Tke  Book  of 


*i  it 


o 


ATHLETICS 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


pnyfii  ^^nm  \mti 


•7^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/bookofathleticsoOObingiala 


Thi:  Book  of  xVphletics 


OUT-OF-DOOR   SPORTS 


CONTAINING  PRACTICAL  ADVICE  AND  SUGGESTIONS   FROM  COLLEGE 
TEAM-CAPTAINS  AND  OTHER  AMATEURS,  ON   FOOT-BALL, 
BASE-BALL,    TENNIS,    ROWING,    GOLF,    SPRINT- 
ING, BICYCLING,  SWIMMING,  SKAT- 
ING,  YACHTING,    ETC. 


EDITF.n   BY 

NORMAN   VV.    BINGHAM,  Jr. 


ILLUSTRATED  BY  G.   IV.  PICK  NELL  AND  OTHERS 


BOSTON 
LOTHROP  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 


Copyright,  1895, 

BY 

LoTHROP  Publishing  Company. 


All  rights  reserved. 


TVPOtlRAPHV    BY   C.   J.    PBTKRS  &   SON, 


PRESSWORK    BY    ROCKWELL     AND     CHURCHILL,    BOSTON,    U.S.A. 


(9V 


PREFACE. 


In  compiling  this  "  Book  of  Athletics,"  no  at- 
tempt has  been  made  to  produce  an  exhaustive 
treatise  on  every  branch  of  sport  now  popular 
with  the  boys  and  girls  of  America.  The  design 
has  been,  rather,  to  give  to  those  who  are 
interested  in,  and  have  some  knowledge  of,  the 
principal  out-of-door  sports  the  benefit  of  the 
experience  and  observation  of  those  who  have 
spent  considerable  time  in  their  pursuit.  Discus- 
sions which  would  be  intelligible  and  of  interest 
only  to  experts,  as  well  as  definitions  and  de- 
scriptions for  the  benefit  of  the  wholly  uninitiated, 
have  been  generally  avoided. 

In  the  list  of  games,  no  pretence  has  been  made 
of  including  all  that  are  practised  at  the  present 
time :  the  intention  has  been  to  include  those 
which   have   a  strong  hold   on   popularity,  such  as 

5 

1318287 


6  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

foot-ball,  base-ball,  rowing,  tennis,  cricket,  swim- 
ming, skating,   and  the  like. 

Several  forms  of  sport  not  properly  included 
under  the  term  "  athletics,"  but  which  are  emi- 
nently desirable  for  the  recreative  exercise  they 
furnish,  have  been  thought  worthy  of  a  place  in 
a  book  which  aims  quite  as  much  to  awaken  and 
increase  a  healthy  interest  in  out-of-door  life  as 
to  point  the  way  to  absolute  excellence  in  com- 
petition. At  the  same  time,  it  is  felt  that  the 
advice  offered  by  such  authorities  as  Messrs.  Ban- 
croft, Dwight,  Cumnock,  Bliss,  Mapes,  and  others, 
cannot  but  be  of  interest  to  all  lovers  of  sport. 

The  descriptive  article  on  "  Knots,  Hitches,  and 
Splices"  has  been  included  as  a  valuable  adjunct 
to  the  paper  on  "Yachting." 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


Chapter.  Page. 

I.    The  Use  and  Abuse  of  Athletics 9 

By  the  Editor. 

II.     Advice  to  School  Foot-Ball  Captains  ....      21 
Bv  Arthur  J.  Cumnock. 

III.  Handling  a  College  Nine 33 

By  Lawrence  T.  Bliss. 

IV.  Seven   Good   Rules   for  Base-Ball   Players  to 

BEAR  in  Mind 40 

Bv  W.  S.  Martin,  Jr. 

V.     A  Sermon  on  Lawn  Tennis 42 

By  James  Dwight. 

VI.     How  to  train  a  Crew 56 

By  William  A.  Bancroft. 

VII.  Cricket  as  played  in  America 75 

By  Ralph  Cracknell. 

VIII.  Golf:  the  Coming  Game 88 

By  Hugh  S.  Hart. 

IX.    About  Bicycles .      96 

By  Kirk  Munroe. 

X.     Running  and  Hurdling 107 

By  Norman  \V.  Bingham,  Jr. 

7 


8  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 

Chapter.  Page. 

XI.    Hare  and  Hounds  Runs 121 

By  David  W.  Fenton,  2d. 

XII.    Hints  for  Young  Pedestrians 128 

By  Charles  M.  Skinner. 

XIII.  OuT-OF-DooR  Gymnastics 146 

By  John  Graham. 

XIV.  How   TO   MAKE   AN   OUT-DoOR   GYMNASIUM  .       .       .      .       I56 

By  William  F.  Garcelon. 

XV.     Hints  for  Yachtsmen 164 

By  Julius  A.  Palmer,  Jr. 

XVI.    The  Art  of  Swimming 190 

By  Harry  E.  Rose. 

XVII.    Sport  in  the  Water 203 

By  Alexander  Black. 

XVIII.    A  Cane  Rush .225 

By  Malcolm  Townsend. 

XIX.     Hurdling 238 

By  Herbert  Mapes. 

XX.    The  Running  Broad  Jump 252 

By  E.  B.  Bloss. 

XXI.    Skating 259 

By  Charles  R.  Talbot. 

XXII.    Hand-in-Hand  Skating 267 

By  W.  G.  Van  T.  Sutphen. 

XXIII.  Knots,  Hitches,  and  Splices 280 

By  Charles  R.  Talbot. 

XXIV.  Summer  Sports 295 

By  the  Editor. 
Index 315 


THE   USE   AND   ABUSE   OF   ATHLETICS. 

BY    THE    EDITOR. 

C  VERY  healthy  boy  hkes  to  be  out  of  doors  ;  and 
ahiiost  every  boy  is,  at  some  period  in  his  Hfe, 
an  enthusiast  on  tl>e  subject  of  athletics.  Every 
sane  man  is  ready  to  allow  that  a  certain  amount  of 
out-door  life  and  exercise  is  desirable,  —  a  tonic  to 
both  mind  and  body,  and,  on  the  whole,  quite  essen- 
tial to  a  well-ordered  existence.  But  on  the  value 
of  competition,  the  grown  men  are  hardly  as  ready 
to  agree  as  are  the  boys. 

There  are  some,  to  be  sure,  who,  bidding  for 
popularity  with  youth,  are  ever  willing  to  overlook 
excesses.  With  "  Boys  will  be  boys,"  or  "  Wel- 
lington's armies  were  trained  on  foot-ball  fields," 
they  meet  all  objections  raised  against  athletics,  and 
end  by  saying  impressively,  "  Mens  sana  in  cor  pore 
sano"  quite  taking  it  for  granted  that  the  mens 
sana   will    be    there   any  way.     They  talk  as  they 

9 


lO  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

do  because  it  is  easier  and  pleasanter  to  let  evils 
exist  than  to  attempt  to  reform  them.  They  should 
not,  and  I  believe  do  not,  enlist  any  great  measure 
of  respect  from  sensible  boys. 

Then,  there  are  the  chronic  grumblers,  though 
luckily  their  number  is  small.  These  men,  having 
forgotten  that  they  were  ever  boys,  or  perhaps 
never  having  been  real  boys,  fume  and  rant,  and 
give  you  to  understand  that  all  time  spent  in  the 
field  or  on  the  water  is  worse  than  wasted.  Feel- 
ing themselves  that,  sooner  or  later,  the  world  must 
look  dark  to  every  one,  they  would  hurry  the 
natural  course  of  things  by  forcing  boys  and  girls 
to  wear  smoked  glasses.  Their  opposition  to  ath- 
letics is  prejudiced,  abusive,  and  often  absurd. 
They  are  more  deserving  of  pity  than  of  anything 
else. 

But  there  is  still  another  class  of  the  older  men 
who  have  the  real  welfare  of  the  boys  close  at 
heart;  by  them  the  athletic  craze  which  has  pos- 
sessed the  country  during  the  past  few  years  has 
been  observed  with  no  little  apprehension.  They 
shake  their  heads,  and  rightly,  at  the  all-too- 
marked  difference  between  the  zeal  with  which  the 
boy  of  to-day  enters  into  his  games,  and  the  list- 


THE    USE    AND    ABUSE    OF    ATHLETICS.  II 

lessness  with  which  he  performs  the  more  serious 
tasks  which  his  school  duties  bring  him.  They  are 
not,  Hke  the  grumblers,  hostile  to  all  that  is  bright 
and  pleasure-producing  ;  but  they  do  realize  that, 
when  what  should  be  a  means  becomes  an  end, 
something  is  going  wrong.  They  find  a  boy  in  the 
class-room  working  out  foot-ball  problems  on  the 
fly-leaf  of  his  algebra,  looking  at  no  part  of  the 
daily  papers  except  the  sporting-pages,  sometimes 
almost  deifying  a  favorite  pitcher  or  half-back,  and 
they  wonder  what  the  end  of  all  this  is  going  to 
be.  They  ask  themselves  if,  on  the  whole,  the 
good  that  comes  from  athletics  is  not  more  than 
outweighed  by  the  evil ;  and  they  do  not  always 
find  at  once  an  easy  answer  to  the  question. 

Now,  between  those  who  enter  into  competition 
solely  for  the  sake  of  winning  a  prize  or  a  victory, 
and  those  who  love  the  sport  for  its  own  sake,  there 
has  always  been  a  distinction.  The  word  "  athlete" 
found  its  derivation  in  a  name  which  was  applied 
to  those  old  Greeks  who  strove  for  prizes  in  the 
games.  It  was  never  used  to  designate  those  who 
daily  practised  in  the  gymnasium  from  love  of  ex- 
ercise pure  and  simple.  The  athlete  of  that  time, 
however,  did  not  think  one  quarter  as  much  about 


12  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

the  prize  itself  as  about  the  glory  that  went  with 
victory,  which  was  very  great.  We  have  all  read 
with  some  wonder  of  how  a  Greek  town  would 
make  a  breach  in  its  walls  at  the  home-coming  of 
its  victorious  representative,  and  would  erect  a 
statue  to  his  honor.  But,  after  all,  the  esteem  which 
is  paid  to  some  young  athletes  to-day  is  scarcely 
less  extravagant,  and,  were  we  not  used  to  hearing 
of  it,  might  sound  nearly  as  strange. 

What,  then,  it  may  be  asked,  is  the  justification, 
if  any,  for  the  intense  interest  in  these  games,  and 
the  spending  of  so  much  time  and  money  in  their 
pursuit?  Do  not  the  "highly  competitive"  sports, 
as  compared  with  the  lighter  games  and  those 
out-of-door  pursuits  which  are  purely  recreative, 
receive  proportionately  too  great  an  amount  of 
attention?  Probably  they  do,  and  yet  some  of  the 
benefits  they  bring  with  them  are  so  undoubted 
that  they  cannot  be  lightly  disregarded. 

The  average  American  boy  is  of  rather  a  high- 
strung  and  nervous  temperament.  He  likes  action  ; 
he  wishes  to  be  doing  something,  and,  quite  nat- 
urally, prefers  that  something  to  be  anything  rather 
than  real  work.  Very  fortunately  the  greater  part 
of  his  superfluous  energy  finds  its  escape  through 


•    THE    USE    AND    ABUSE   OF    ATHLETICS.  1 3 

his  devotion  to  athletic  sports.  Fortunately,  I  say, 
for  in  thus  harmlessly  gratifying  his  appetite  for 
excitement  he  involuntarily  learns  many  a  useful 
lesson. 

First  of  all,  he  learns,  when  he  trains  for  a  team, 
what  it  is  to  be  subject  to  discipline.  He  readily 
and  willingly  imposes  on  himself  many  hardships, 
because  he  sees  that  they  are  necessary  if  he  would 
succeed.  He  is  at  an  a^e  when  there  is  somethino- 
which  he  can  do  as  well  as  any  one,  even  though 
that  something  is  only  athletics.  For  once  he  be- 
comes interested,  and  works  with  enthusiasm,  —  an 
enthusiasm  which,  if  it  is  mistaken,  must  neverthe- 
less gain  the  respect  even  of  those  who  see  its 
folly.  If  this  sometimes  leads  him  into  error,  he 
should  be  set  right,  but  not  necessarily  deprived 
of  his  sport. 

Perseverance,  otherwise  known  as  "  sand,"  is  an- 
other thing  of  which  a  boy  soons  learns  the  value. 
He  sees  that  he  must  fight  hard  to  the  very  end, 
every  time,  if  he  is  to  accomplish  anything  The 
"quitter"  never  amounts  to  much;  and  this  fact 
the  boy  who  undertakes  the  practice  of  any  form 
of  athletics  must  quickly  recognize.  It  is  hard 
to  see  how  this  steady  pegging  away  in  the  face  of 


14  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

all  discouraofements  can  fail  to  have  its  influence 
in  makinor  a  more  valuable  lot  of  men. 

Aside  from  the  effect  on  the  disposition,  there  is 
of  course  the  physical  good  which  comes  from 
regular  exercise.  It  will  probably  be  argued  that 
the  exercise  could  as  well,  or  better,  be  taken  with- 
out the  strain  of  severe  competition.  This  is  per- 
fectly true ;  and  the  only  question  is.  Would  it  ? 
It  is  doubtful  if,  without  the  incentive  of  the  com- 
petition, it  would  be  possible  to  get  anything  like 
the  number  of  young  men  to  take  regular  exercise 
that  now  do  so.  Once  one  has  formed  the  habit, 
however,  it  is  noticeable  that  he  will  generally 
arrange  to  spend  a  certain  amount  of  time  in 
the  open  air  long  after  he  has  given  up  regular 
games  and  training.  To  know  the  blessedness  of 
being  in  perfect  condition  is  enough  to  make  any 
one  feel  that,  in  training  or  out,  it  is  worth  while 
to  take  care  of  himself. 

And  yet  the  evils  which  are  charged  to  athletics 
are  not  all  imaginary.  Not  even  the  warmest  en- 
thusiast can  claim  that.  The  point  which  perhaps 
is  responsible  for  the  greatest  number  of  strictures 
is  the  question  of  interference  with  studies  or  work, 
concerning  which  one  hears  a  great  deal  of  worth- 


•^ 


f  I- 


THE    USE    AND    ABUSE    OF   ATHLETICS.  I7 

less  talk.  It  is  easy,  on  one  hand,  to  show  that  the 
hours  occupied  in  getting  to  the  grounds  and  back, 
and  going  through  the  daily  training,  are  no  more 
than  every  boy  ought  to  spend  in  such  a  way ;  and 
it  is  equally  easy  to  turn  around  and  point  to 
numerous  cases  where  boys  do  neglect  their  stud- 
ies for  athletics.  Considering  the  question  calmly, 
it  seems  perfectly  evident  that,  as  a  rule,  the  boys 
who  take  active  part  in  any  of  the  games  do  devote 
too  much  time  to  them.  But  this  is  because  a  great 
amount  of  time  is  wasted.  Boys  will  linger  about, 
long  after  they  are  through  practising.  They  let 
their  attention  wander  off  to  the  field  when  other 
subjects  have  claims  upon  it.  This  is  a  bad  habit, 
not  alone  from  the  standpoint  of  the  instructor,  but 
also  from  that  of  the  athlete.  "Over-training"  is 
well  known  to  result  from  mental  as  well  as  physi- 
cal causes ;  and  he  who  lets  himself  brood  con- 
stantly over  the  games  he  is  to  play,  or  the  races 
he  is  to  run,  will  more  than  likely  soon  find  himself 
growing  "stale."  It  is  perfectly  possible  to  take 
part  in  athletics,  and  to  do  the  rest  of  one's  school 
work  properly ;  and  when  every  boy  who  is  a  lover 
of  out-of-door  sports  makes  up  his  mind  to  demon- 
strate this  statement,  the  objections  will  cease. 


1 8  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

The  trickery  and  deceit  which  are  countenanced 
in  some  games  —  which,  indeed,  are  sometimes 
considered  a  part  of  them  —  are  all  wrong.  The 
games  should  breed  manliness  and  generosity,  not 
treachery  and  cunning.  Yet  we  find  that,  in  base- 
ball, boys  who  in  most  things  are  the  soul  of 
honesty  will  cut  across  from  first  to  third  base  if 
the  chance  offers,  will  claim  to  have  cauo-ht  a  ball 
"  on  the  fly,"  which  they  know  to  have  touched  the 
ground,  and  will  do  many  other  things  which  are 
simply  dishonest.  There  is  certainly  a  danger  that 
such  loose  standards  may  in  time  be  applied  to 
the  rest  of  a  boy's  living.  What  is  wanted  is  the 
nobler  spirit  of  "  fair  play." 

Athletics,  as  they  are,  doubtless  tend  in  many 
cases  to  distort  a  young  boy's  estimate  of  the  de- 
sirability of  physical  as  compared  with  intellectual 
and  moral  force.  This  tendency  can  best  be  coun- 
teracted by  a  determined  effort  on  the  part  of  the 
boys  who  have  grown  up.  They  must  try  to  keep 
in  touch  with  the  younger  generation,  set  things 
right  where  they  go  wrong,  and,  above  all,  prevent 
boys  who  lack  stability  of  character  from  becoming 
leaders. 

Meanwhile,  the  tremendous  and  irrational  excite- 


THE    USE    AND    ABUSE    OF   ATHLETICS.  I9 

ment  which  has  been  customary  at  the  time  of  our 
more  prominent  athletic  contests  seems  to  have 
reached  its  hmit,  and  already  there  are  signs  of 
a  healthy  reaction.  The  result  of  this  reaction  will 
doubtless  be  to  force  athletics  to  the  field  they 
should  occupy  —  a  systematic  means  of  physical 
development.  Incidentally,  an  increasing  interest 
in  sport  for  sport's  sake  may  be  aroused.  As  the 
number  of  spectators  at  a  big  game  diminishes, 
so  may  the  number  of  people  exercising  increase. 
Competition  is  a  good  thing,  but  it  may  be  car- 
ried too  far.  Moderation  seems  to  be  what  is 
most  needed  at  present. 

What  we  have  to  look  forward  to,  then,  is  not 
the  arranging  of  more  "  championship "  games, 
which  draw  from  ten  thousand  to  thirty  thousand 
people  to  see  them,  but  a  more  careful  and  more 
intelligent  caring  for  the  bodily  welfare  on  the  part 
of  a  larger  number  of  people.  Most  men  do  not 
take  as  good  care  of  themselves  as  they  do  of  their 
dogs  and  horses.  Athletics,  rightly  used,  will  tend 
to  counteract  this  carelessness. 

It  would  be  well  if  every  boy  were  to  set  up  for 
himself  a  standard  of  manhood  to  which  he  would 
like    to    attain.     Let    him    remember  that  strength 


20  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

and  power  are  the  results  of  generations  of  temper- 
ance and  right  Hving,  and  that  in  taking  the  best 
of  care  of  himself  a  boy  is,  at  least,  doing  his  share 
toward  the  realization  of  a  race  of  stronger  men 
and  more  beautiful  women. 


ADVICE    TO   SCHOOL   FOOT-BALL 
CAPTAINS. 

BY   ARTHUR   J.    CUMNOCK, 
Captain  of  the  Harvard  Foot-ball  Teams  of  1889  and  i8go. 


HE  average  school,  with  small  num- 
bers and  only  a  few  large  boys  to 
pick  from,  is  at  a  disadvantage 
when  pitted  against  one  of  the 
great  schools,  such  as  Exeter, 
Andover,    Groton,    St.    Marks,   or 

Running  and  Warding  Off.     t  mi  t->.*  r^iii 

Lawrenceville.  But  m  loot-ball, 
skill  and  spirit  will  take  the  place  of  weight  and 
brute  force  every  time. 

Every  school  captain  is  anxious  to  work,  but  per- 
haps does  not  know  where  to  begin  or  how  to 
develop  his  team.  The  game  seems  to  be  formi- 
dable and  intricate  at  first,  and  one  is  apt  to  begin 
at   the    wrong  end.     Instead  of   planning  "  touch- 


22  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

downs"  and  big  scores,  you  must  begin  at  the 
foundation  ;  you  must  creep  before  you  can  walk. 
On  this  foundation,  so  often  neglected,  everything 
depends ;  without  it  you  cannot  hope  for  team  play 
or  success. 

In  order  to  make  clear  what  is  meant  by  founda- 
tion, let  us  look  at  a  few  practical  facts. 

A  team  cannot  make  ground  against  an  equally 
good  team,  unless  it  can  "  block  ;  "  and,  vice  versa,  an 
eleven  cannot  stop  an  opponent  from  advancing 
the  ball,  unless  it  can  get  through  and  tackle.  A 
team's  offensive  play  depends  almost  entirely  upon 
the  accuracy  with  which  the  centre  rush  passes 
the  ball  to  the  quarter-back ;  on  the  ability  of  the 
quarter  to  pick  the  ball  up,  however  badly  it  may 
come  back,  and  pass  it  accurately  to  the  runner ; 
on  the  ability  of  the  halves  to  run  strongly, 
dodge,  use  the  arm,  and  catch  the  ball ;  on  the 
blocking  off  of  the  team,  and  the  runner's  ability 
to  take  advantage  of  it.  When  a  team  is  pressed 
to  the  last  extremity,  it  depends  upon  a  sure  kick. 
A  game  has  often  been  saved  by  a  safe  catch  or 
a  quick  fall  on  the  ball  after  a  muff. 

These  few  examples  will  serve  to  show  you  that 
every  movement  in  foot-ball  depends  directly  upon 


ADVICE   TO    SCHOOL    FOOT-BALL   CAPTAINS.  23 

several  details.  Such  details  are  what  make  up  the 
foundation,  and  on  their  perfection  depends  good 
team  play. 

I    can    best    illustrate   what  is   meant  by  "  team 
play,"  and  its  relation  to  these    details,  by  asking 


The  Snap  Back. 

you  to  imagine  a  board  in  which  eleven  ink-wells 
have  been  imbedded.  Pour  ink  into  each  of  these 
wells.  Then  as  you  pour  a  little  more  into  every 
one,  they  overflow  their  edges  till  the  overflow  of 
each  meets  the  overflow  of  its  neighbor,  and  the 
board  is  covered.  If  you  should  neglect  to  pour 
the  "  little  more"  into  any  well,  the  overflow  of  the 
others  would  have  to  cover  its  part,  and  the  total 
covering  would  be  just  so  much  thinner. 

So  when  each  boy  on  a  foot-ball  eleven  conquers 


24  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

the  duties  of  his  own  position,  he  can  enlarge  his 
sphere  of  action  till  he  meets  the  rest  of  the  team 
doing  the  same  thing ;  then  the  relations  between 
the  different  positions  can  be  perfected,  one  boy 
helping  another,  till  the  whole  team  takes  a  part  in 
every  play.  The  mastery  of  these  details  is  often 
neglected ;  and  when  the  time  comes  for  the  eleven 
to  exert  itself  as  a  unit,  each  player  is  so  much  oc- 
cupied in  "  filling  his  own  well,"  that  he  cannot  give 
any  strength  or  attention  to  the  rest  of  the  team, 
but  leaves  it  to  the  other  ten. 

The  aim  of  every  captain  is  to  have  his  team  play 
as  one  rrian  ;  and  this  is  evidently  dependent  on  the 
strength  and  resources  his  players  are  able  to  give 
to  a  concentrated  effort.  So  he  may  well  study  into 
everything  that  will  tend  toward  this  end. 

Every  detail  of  foot-ball  is  a  problem  which  may 
be  solved  by  study.  These  details  must  be  studied 
out  of  the  field,  however,  and  the  solutions  put  to  a 
test  during  practice  games.  To  solve  these  difficul- 
ties on  the  field  you  will  find  is  as  perplexing  as  to 
learn  an  arithmetic  or  geometry  lesson  out  there. 

Take,  for  instance,  blocking  and  getting  through. 
There  are  a  great  many  ways  of  doing  these  things, 
and  you  cannot  find   them  all  out  in  a  minute  or 


ADVICE   TO    SCHOOL    FOOT-BALL    CAPTAINS. 


25 


two ;  you  must  live  with  them.  Think  out  ways, 
invent  new  methods,  and  then  try  them.  Do  not 
make  them  too  compHcated,  and  do  not  get  dis- 
couraged because  something  you  thought  was  good 
"  doesn't  work."  No  two  boys 
are  of  the  same  size,  strength, 
quickness,  or  mental  capacity  ; 
and  what  one  boy  can  do  well, 
another  would  find  himself  un- 
fitted for.  Each  boy's  quali- 
ties must  be  studied  into  to 
get  the  best  results.  For  in- 
stance, Newell,  the  old  Har- 
vard player,  used  to  get 
through  as  well  as,  if  not  better  than,  any  one  in 
the  country.  Some  one  at  Yale  understood  this, 
and  invented  a  new  way  to  stop  him.  Winter,  who 
was  his  opponent,  stood  back  a  yard  or  two  and  let 
Newell  start  first.  As  he  was  going  by.  Winter 
and  Bliss,  a  half-back  who  stood  near,  threw  their 
weight  on  him  from  an  angle,  and  either  pushed 
him  back  or  blocked  him  off. 

Tackling  is  only  a  knack,  and  can  be  studied  as 
well  as  wrestling.  For  instance,  S.  V.  R.  Crosby, 
Harvard  '91,  an  end-rush,  could  not  tackle;  and  it 


Punting. 


26 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


Tackling. 


was  almost  impossible  to  explain  the  way  to  do  it. 
Finally  a  bag  was  hung  up,  on  which  was  a  projec- 
tion representing  an  arm,  so  he 
could  not  tackle  high. 
This  bag  was  swung  for 
Crosby  to  get  the  knack 
of  ducking,  taking  hold, 
and  throwing.  He  studied 
it  all  out,  and  in  three  or 
four  days  he  tackled 
Y^,--^   beautifully. 

Practice  off  the  field 
will  enable  the  cen- 
tre-rush to  pass  the  ball  correctly  to  the  quarter 
every  time.  By  passing  for  an  hour  a  day  during 
the  summer,  a  quarter-back  will  find  that  he  can 
handle  a  foot-ball  as  easily  as  he  can  a  base-ball, 
and  throw  it  as  accurately.  If  he  follows  the  ball, 
trying  to  get  into  imaginary  plays  when  he  is 
practising,  in  a  regular  game  he  will  keep  up  with 
the  ball,  and  be  able  to  block  off  for  the  runner. 

A  back's  duties  require  skill  and  accuracy  for 
every  movement,  and  there  is  no  limit  to  the  possi- 
bilities of  his  position.  He  can  work  up  kicking, 
catching,   running  with  a  ball,  using  his  arm,  and, 


ADVICE   TO    SCHOOL    FOOT-BALL    CAPTAINS.  29 

among  many  other  things,  how  to  take  advantage 
of  blocking  off. 

During  one  whole  summer,  Everett  Lake,  the 
Harvard  half-back,  practised  warding  off  tacklers 
with  his  arm.  When  autumn  came  he  was  one 
of  the  most  difficult  halves  in  the  country  to  stop, 
because,  in  addition  to  his  great  weight  and  strength, 
the  tackier  was  nearly  always  kept  at  arm's  length. 

The  kicking  of  Captain  Trafford  of  the  Harvard 
'91  and  '92  elevens  illustrated  what  study  and  hard 
work  can  do  for  a  full-back.  In  July,  in  the  sum- 
mer before  he  came  to  college,  he  could  not  drop- 
kick  at  all.  Part  of  a  week  was  spent  in  simply 
studying  the  way  to  make  a  drop-kick.  He  worked 
an  hour  or  two  every  day  during  the  summer ;  and 
when  he  came  to  college  in  the  fall,  he  could  drop 
the  ball  from  the  thirty-five  yard  line  between  the 
goal-posts  nearly  every  time. 

When  a  captain  gets  so  that  he  is  able  to  reason 
these  details  out,  and  when  his  team  sees  how  easy 
it  is  for  them  to  settle  any  difficulty  by  study,  they 
are  on  the  road  to  success.  I  know  of  a  team 
that  was  said  to  have  coached  itself;  this  simply 
means  they  played  foot-ball  not  like  so  many  ma- 
chines, but  like  thinking  and  reasoning  beings. 


30 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


During  the  practice  game,  when  a  misplay  is 
discovered,  do  not  blame  the  team  without  telHng 
them  how  to  overcome  it.  Put  them  back  in  the 
positions  they  were  in  when  it  happened,  and  the 
trouble  will  soon  appear.  Then  show  them  the  way 
to  prevent  it ;  and  if  you  do  not  happen  to  know,  do 
not  be  ashamed  to  study  it  out  with  them. 

The  spirit  of  a  team  is  another  important  element. 
An  eleven  going  into  a  match  with  great  skill  and 
a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
game  possesses  a  confidence 
that  is  half  the  battle.  In  se- 
lecting the  boys  for  your  team, 
give    preference   to    those    who 

are  honest  hard  workers  ;  "^^Q^i^^      r> 

avoid   "  stars,"  who    save 


A  Try  for  Qoal. 

themselves  from  the  regular  team  work  for  starding 
individual  plays.  A  Harvard  captain  was  once 
giving  his  last  instructions  to  the  team  before  a 
Yale  game.     Turning   to  the  end-rushers  he  said. 


ADVICE    TO    SCHOOL    FOOT-BALL    CAPTAINS.  3 1 

•'  I  shall  hold  you  alone  responsible  for  being  down 
on  the  ball  every  time  after  a  kick ;  "  when  the 
centre-rush,  whose  duty  it  was  to  block,  and  who 
had  little  chance  to  do  anything  else,  said,  "  I  am 
going  to  be  down  there  too."  And  he  was.  He 
did  his  own  blocking,  and  was  often  down  the  field 
before  the  ends  got  there.  That  kind  of  spirit  will 
win  a  victory  every  time. 

You  will  find,  in  executing  the  different  plays 
and  moves  you  may  plan,  that  the  matter  of  detail 
still  occupies  a  prominent  position.  You  may  tell  a 
player  to  go  to  a  certain  place;  but  to  obtain  the 
best  results  you  must  show  him  how  he  is  to  go, 
and  what  he  is  to  do  when  he  gets  there.  Make 
your  players  start  from  the  same  positions  in  as 
many  moves  as  you  can,  so  that  your  opponent 
cannot  tell  what  your  plan  of  action  is ;  in  this 
way  you  can  pass  quickly  from  one  play  to  another 
without  a  change  of  position.  Make  each  boy's 
duties  simple,  and  have  him  do  the  same  thing  in 
as  many  moves  as  possible.  Do  not  waste  your 
time  on  complicated  tricks  ;  team  play  is  absolutely 
necessary  for  success.  This  comes  from  developing 
the  players  and  their  positions  from  the  foundation 
up,  and  not  from  attempting  intricate  moves  with 


32 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


boys  who  do  not  understand  the  rudiments  of  the 
game. 

Make  your  signals  simple,  easy  to  be  remem- 
bered, and  at  the  same  time  effective.  A  com- 
plicated code  of  signals  will  puzzle  your  own 
side,  when  excited,  quite  as  much  as  it  does  your 
opponents. 

In  conclusion,  study  the  details  of  each  posi- 
tion of  your  eleven,  and  develop  your  players  so 
they    may  have  resources  at  their 

command.  MHK^""^"  t^v*}^  Show  them  the  re- 
la  t  i  o  n  s  be- 
tween  the 


Falling  on  a  Muff. 

different  positions,  and  teach  them  to  play  into 
each  other's  hands.  Your  reward  will  be  that  in 
every  movement,  from  making  a  hole  to  stopping 
an  end  play,  you  will  have  eleven  players  concen- 
trated, who  know  how  to  play  together  for  the 
same   end. 

This  is  a  hard  kind  of  a  team  to  beat,  for  they 
make  few  misplays  themselves,  and  know  how  to 
take  advantage  of  their  opponents'  errors. 


HANDLING  A   COLLEGE   NINE. 

BY    LAWRENCE    T.    BLISS, 

Captain  of  ttu  Vale  Base-ball  Team  of  1893. 


F 


'OR  the  last  few  years  the  game  of 
base-ball,   in  colleges  and  univer- 
'^kuEW^'\  sities,    has  lost  much    of   its    popu- 
Jfc]_^^p^    larity,  and    has   given   way  to   foot- 
ball, which,  as  now  played,  is  prac- 
tically a  new  game. 

The  reason  is  that  base-ball  is 
more  or  less  in  the  hands  of  pro- 
fessionals, while  foot-ball  is  as  yet 
entirely  free    from   what  one  would 

Hip  Exercise.  11    ,/  r         •  1*  >• 

call  '  professionalism. 
This  article  is  written  from  a  college  point  of 
view,  and  is  designed  to  tell  the  young  base-ball 
enthusiasts  something  concerning  the  handling  and 
training  of  a  base-ball  team  in  one  of  our  Ameri- 
can colleges. 

As  soon  as  the  foot-ball  season  is  over,  the  cap- 

33 


34 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


Knee  Exercise. 


tain  and  manager  of  the  base-ball  team  decide  as 
to  their  plans  for  the  coming  season.  These  include 
the  number  of  games  that  shall 
be  scheduled  away  from  home, 
and  also  the  home  games,  plan- 
ning for  the  Easter  trip,  obtain- 
ing a  competent  man  to  coach 
the  candidates  for  pitcher,  and 
many  other  minor  details  that 
scarcely  need  mention  here. 
No  regular  training  is  com- 
menced until  about  the  first  of  February,  when 
all  candidates  are  requested  to  present  themselves 
at  the  gymnasium. 

The  first  training  is  an  av- 
erage daily  afternoon  run  of 
from  a  mile  and  a  half  to 
two  miles ;  after  this  the  can- 
didates go  to  the  "  cage." 
In  this  building  the  candi- 
dates assemble,  and  go 
through  a  variety  of  move- 
ments designed  to  limber  up 
the  muscles ;  these  exercises  include  moving  the 
body  up  and  down,  keeping  the  back  straight,  and 


Bach  Exercise. 


HANDLING   A   COLLEGE    NINE. 


35 


The  Pitcher. 


bending  the   knees ;   then,  bending  the   back  from 

the  hips,  with  arms  straight  out  from 

the  shoulders,  and  trying  to  touch  the 

ground  without  bending  the  knees ; 

raising  one's  self  on  tiptoes,  revolv- 

inof  the  arms  in  a  circle   in   front  of 

the  chest,  first  in  one  direction,  then 

the  opposite ;  and  finally,  with  hands 

on  hips,   moving  the  body  from  one 

side  to  the  other. 

On  Wednesday  and  Saturday  after- 
noons, these  being  half-holidays,  the 

training   work   commences    earlier.     Before    taking 

the  accustomed  run,  a  few 
grounders  are  knocked  to 
each  man,  the  benefit  being 
very  great,  as  it  teaches  a 
playfer  to  handle  himself 
well,  even  though  he  is 
an  outfielder.  Outfielders 
have  quite  a  number  of 
grounders  to  stop  during 
the  season,  and  many 
games    have    been    lost 

through  the  inability  of  some  of  the  men  to  stop 


The  Catcher  in  Armor. 


36 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


such  balls.  This  practice  also  limbers  the  player's 
throwing  arm,  as  he  throws  nearly  the  length  oi 
the  cage.  It  is  also  a  great  help  to 
a  captain,  as  it  is  the  only  way  in 
which  he  is  able  to  test,  weed  out, 
and  get  rid  of  some  of  his  superfluous 
material.  For  these  reasons,  too,  it  is 
well  to  practise  picking  up  grounders 
even  in  a  gymnasium  with  a  wooden 
floor,  if  a  school  team  is  deprived  of 
the  advantaofes  of  a  cao-e. 

When  the  number  of  candidates  is 

Watching  Bases,    j-educed   a  little,   and   the    days    grow 

longer,    the    Wednesday   and    Saturday    afternoon 

practice    is    taken    up    daily,    and   base    sliding    is 

added. 

Base    slidinor   on    the    hard   orround   in   the  cao^e 

o  o  «t> 

requires  a  good  deal  of  nerve  for  a  man  who  has 
never  slid  head  first  before.  Even  if  he  has  the 
required  nerve,  he  is  often  liable  to  injure  him- 
self. For  this  reason  Mr.  Stagg,  a  former  captain 
of  the  Yale  base-ball  team,  invented  a  sliding 
machine,  which  consists  of  a  wooden  frame  with 
a  heavy  piece  of  carpet  stretched  tight  across  it. 
This    is    so  placed  that  the  carpet  rests  upon   the 


HANDLING    A    COLLEGE    NINE. 


37 


ground.     After  a  few  lessons  on  this,  the  new  men 
slide  on  the  ground  without  fear  of  being  hurt. 

About  the  first  of  March  the  coach  arrives, 
and  takes  charge  of  the  pitchers. 
A  college  team  should  have  four 
pitchers.  Two  of  them  should  be 
first-class  ones,  and  the  other  two 
above  the  average.  It  is  always 
a  good  thing  to  have  an  eye  on 
the  future  in  selecting  and  coach- 
ing pitchers;  for  a  college,  sooner 
or  later,  has  to  lose  its  star  play- 
ers, as  graduation  day  comes 
around  and  the  senior  is  no 
longer  an  undergraduate. 

There  are  many  different  opinions  in  regard  to 
the  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  using  a  cage 
to  practise  batting  in.  It  has  many  disadvantages 
for  this  particular  use.  The  light  is  apt  to  be  very 
poor ;  the  space  too  small.  Because  of  these  two 
drawbacks  the  eye  is  compelled  to  follow  the  ball  in 
an  enclosure  with  a  background.  When  he  is  in  the 
open  field  the  player  will  find  what  a  difference  this 
makes.  A  good  example  of  these  disadvantages 
was  seen  in  the  Harvards'  heavy  batting  team  of 


The  First  Baseman. 


38  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

1 89 1.     They  did  not  use  the  cage  to  practise  bat- 
ting in,  although  they  have  an  excellent  one. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  this  cage  practice  is  ex- 
cellent in  giving  a  man  batting  form,  and  practice 
in  swinging  the  bat.  The  cage  is  invaluable  also 
for  battery  practice. 

It  is  very  seldom  that  a  team  can  obtain  more 
than  a  week's  out-door  practice  before  the  Easter 
trip ;  so  by  the  end  of  March, 
which  is  the  time  that  the  Easter  ^ 
trip  commences,  the  team  is  very 
rusty.  About  fifteen  or  sixteen 
men  are  taken  on  the  trip,  and 
a   game    is    arranged    for    every 


Sliding  for  Base. 

day.  These  games,  as  a  rule,  are  against  profes- 
sionals. After  a  week's  play  the  team  returns 
home,  and  plays  two  or  three  games  a  week  dur- 
ing the  remainder  of  the  season.  The  work  at 
the  field  every  afternoon,  except  when  a  game  is 
scheduled,  consists  of  an  hour's  batting  and  a  half- 


HANDLING    A   COLLEGE    NINE.  .  39 

hour's  fielding,  a  little  base  sliding,  and  fifteen  or 
twenty  minutes'  team  practice. 

It  might  be  well  to  say  a  few  words  here  concern- 
ing table  diet  when  training  for  base-ball.  The  old 
custom  was  to  feed  the  different  athletic  teams  on 
nothing  but  rare  beef  and  potatoes.  Now,  how- 
ever, the  bill  of  fare  consists  of  wholesome  food 
with  quite  a  variety.  For  breakfast  we  have  fruit, 
oatmeal,  steak,  omelet,  and  potatoes ;  for  lunch, 
steak,  cold  beef  or  chicken,  and  potatoes  ;  for  din- 
ner we  have  soup,  chicken,  beef,  mashed  potatoes, 
pease  or  corn,  and  tomatoes,  with  bread,  tapioca  or 
custard  pudding  for  dessert,  and  twice  a  week  we 
have  ice-cream.  Toast  is  served  at  every  meal ; 
oatmeal  water  and  milk  to  drink.  The  potatoes 
are  cooked  in  nearly  every  style  except  fried. 
Hashed  and  browned  is  generally  the  favorite  way. 
So,  you  see,  training  is  not  starving. 

This  brief  statement  of  training,  though  referring 
to  college  base-ball  work,  may  also  be  of  sugges- 
tion and  use  to  boys  who  are  going  in  for  a  course 
in  base-ball,  and  wish  to  make  their  home  club 
strong  and  successful  players. 


SEVEN    GOOD   RULES   FOR   BASE-BALL 
PLAYERS   TO    BEAR   IN   MIND. 

BY    W.    S.    MARTIN,    JR. 

Captain  of  the  Tufts  College  Base-ball  Team  of  1893. 

/^*\NE. —  Base  runners  must  always  remember  and 
^^  turn  to  the  right  of  the  foul  line  in  returning 
to  first,  when  they  have  overrun  that  base. 

Two.  —  Batters  should  run  whenever  they  touch 
the  ball,  or  whenever  they  have  struck  three  times 
and  missed  it.  No  matter  if  two  men  are  out,  you 
may  not  be  the  third  one  if  you  run  well. 

Three.  —  It  would  be  well  for  young  players 
to  remember  and  keep  a  base  runner  on  the  third 
base,  if  the  opposing  catcher  is  weak  up  under  the 
bat.  or  if  the  opponent's  pitcher  is  wild. 

Four.  —  To  be  a  good  batter  you  must  stand  up 
to  the  plate  fearlessly,  and  the  ball  must  be  met  by 
the  weight  of  the  body  instead  of  the  swing  of  the 

40 


SEVEN    GOOD    RULES    FOR    BASE-BALL   PLAYERS.        41 

arms.  This  can  be  done  by  resting  on  one  leg,  so 
that  you  can  easily  step  forward  to  meet  the  coming 
ball. 

Five.  —  Infielders  should  always  run  out  to  help 
the  outfielders,  on  the  throw  in  of  a  hard-batted 
ball.     This  may  save  a  run. 

Six.  —  Always  play  for  the  advancing  man.  If 
there  is  a  man  on  first,  the  ball  when  hit  should  be 
played  to  second  and  then  to  first  base.  If  there 
is  a  man  on  first  and  second,  the  ball  should  go  to 
the  third  base,  and  then  to  second. 

Seven.  —  Captains  should  always  strive  to  per- 
fect their  team  play.  It  is  what  wins  games. 
Coach  your  third  baseman  to  try  for  all  balls  batted 
down  that  way,  and  have  him  backed  up  by  the 
short-stop.  Have  the  second  baseman  always  back 
up  your  first  baseman,  and  see  that  your  second 
baseman  and  short- stop  assist  each  other. 


A   SERMON   ON    LAWN   TENNIS. 

BY    JAMES    DWIGHT. 

T  AWN  TENNIS  is  a  curious  game.  It  simply 
consists  in  hitting  a  ball  over  a  net  and  back 
again.  Nothing  else,  except  that  you  try  to  hit  it 
as  hard  as  you  safely  can,  and  to  put  it  out  of  3'our 
opponent's  reach.  It  sounds  easy  enough,  and  yet 
think  how  few  can  play  well.  You  see  people  play 
for  years,  and  play  very  little  better  at  the  end. 
This  would  be  right  and  natural  enough  if  they 
took  no  real  interest  in  the  game,  but  many  of 
them  do. 

In  other  games  and  sports  it  is  not  so.  There 
seems  to  be  no  game  that  so  many  play  and  so  few 
play  well.  Any  ordinary  man  can  learn  to  row, 
respectably  at  least,  if  he  gives  several  years  to  it. 
Almost  any  boy  can  learn  to  play  base-ball.  Most 
men  with  practice  can  learn  to  shoot  pretty  straight. 

And  so  on  ;  but  with  lawn  tennis  it  is  different. 

42 


A   SERMON    ON    LAWN    TENNIS.  43 

There  the  multitude  are  "duffers;"  and  "  duffers  " 
they  remain  all  their  lives.  It  is  a  few  only  who 
come  forward  out  of  the  ranks. 

Why  should  this  be  so  ?  For  many  reasons ;  the 
game  is  not  as  easy  as  it  looks.  It  is  easy  enough 
to  hit  the  ball  gently  out  of  your  hand  over  the  net 
into  some  part  of  the  opposite  court,  but  it  is  not 
so  easy  to  hit  it  hard  and  keep  it  in  court.  It  has 
to  go  very  close  to  the  net  to  do  that.  Then  again, 
it  is  not  enough  to  hit  it  into  any  part  of  the  court ; 
it  must  be  placed  in  some  particular  spot  to  gain 
any  advantage.  It  may  be  necessary  to  place  it 
within  a  few  inches  of  the  side  line.  On  top  of  all 
this,  you  may  have  to  run  at  the  top  of  your  speed 
to  reach  the  ball  at  all. 

All  this  does  not  sound  so  easy.  Yet  there  is 
something  more,  the  faculty  of  playing  the  right 
stroke  every  time.  It  comes  to  a  very  few  men 
as  an  instinct.  It  comes  to  a  laro-er  number  as  the 
result  of  years  of  thought  and  practice.  To  the 
immense  majority  it  never  comes  at  all;  in  fact, 
they  do  not  know  that  such  a  faculty  exists.  Even 
now  we  have  not  got  through  with  the  difficulties 
of  the  game.  Running  about  the  court  is  not  easy 
work.     The  distance  of  each  man  is  not  great,  nor 


44  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

need  the  speed  always  be  high ;  but  you  must  start 
very  quickly,  almost,  in  fact,  before  )'ou  are  sure 
where  the  ball  is  coming.  It  is  really  a  succession 
of  jumps,  rather  than  a  steady  run.  For  this  you 
need  great  quickness  and  agility,  and,  beyond  all, 
great  endurance.  In  other  words,  the  game  needs 
young  men  in  good  condition  to  play  it  well.  On 
the  other  hand,  it  requires  judgment  and  experi- 
ence that  usually  come  only  later  in  life. 

Such  are  some  of  the  difficulties  of  the  game ;  and 
one  does  not  wonder,  as  he  thinks  of  them,  that  the 
game  is  not  better  played.  Why,  then,  some  one 
will  ask,  is  the  game  so  popular  ?  Why  do  so 
many  play  it,  if  they  know  that  they  can  never  play 
it  well?  Because  the  "  duffers"  have  just  as  good 
a  time  as  the  "  cracks."  Sometimes  I  think  that 
they  have  a  better  time  even,  for  with  them  it  is 
all  play  ;  with  the  better  players  it  is  serious  work. 

I  remember  well  the  first  time  I  ever  played  the 
game.  It  was  at  Nahant,  in  the  summer  of  '74. 
A  set  of  lawn  tennis  had  been  brought  over  from 
England  early  in  the  summer ;  but  we  had  taken 
no  interest  in  it  —  too  little,  indeed,  to  try  it.  At 
length  one  day  we  put  up  the  net,  marked  out  a 
rude  court,  and  started,  more  in  jest  than  earnest. 


A    SERMON    ON    LAWN   TENNIS. 


45 


W^ 


In  a  few  moments  we  were  playing  in  earnest 
indeed.  There  was  all  the  feeling  of  personal  an- 
tagonism which  is  to  me  one  of  the  great  attractions 
of  the  game.  My  first  opponent  was  Mr.  F.  R. 
Sears,  an  elder  brother  of  the  ex-champion.  I  re- 
member that  each  won  a  game,  and  that  in  the  after- 
noon we  played  in 
the  rain  in  rubber 
coats  and  boots. 
How  odd  it  would 
look  now  ! 

Of  course  we 
could  not  play 
much,  but  the  in- 
terest was  just  as 
great.  I  fancy  that 
one  reason  for  the 
great  popularity  of 
the  game  lies  in 
the  fact  that  you  do  not  need  to  play  well  to  have 
a  good  time.  You  need  only  an  opponent  of 
about  your  own  strength,  so  that  there  may  be  a 
continual  struggle  for  the  mastery.  For  this  very 
reason,  two  players  are  apt  to  get  into  the  habit 
of  always  playing  together,  and  they  naturally  im- 


Playlng  the  Right  Stroke. 


46  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

prove  very  slowly.  Often  they  see  no  good  play, 
they  have  the  same  ideas  about  the  game  as  when 
they  started,  they  have  the  same  faults,  because 
they  know  no  better. 

I  look  to  see  much  better  lawn  tennis  in  the 
future  than  exists  at  present.  The  game  has  been 
generally  known  about  a  dozen  years  ;  and  it  was 
first  taken  up  largely  by  grown  men,  who  had 
played  rackets,  or  base-ball,  or  cricket.  They 
learned  all  they  could  with  no  one  to  teach  them, 
comparatively  soon,  and  before  this  time  have 
dropped  out  of  active  play  because  the  exertion 
is  beyond  them.  I  am  an  example  of  the  class 
myself;  though  I  lasted  longer  than  most,  as  I 
cared  more  for  the  game. 

Of  course  all  this  time  boys  were  learning  to 
play,  but  very  few  of  them  turned  out  well.  They 
learned  as  they  chose  ;  few  of  them  wished  for  any 
teaching ;  fewer  got  it.  So  for  a  long  time  the 
older  men  were  in   front. 

There  has  now  come  another  change,  and  in  the 
right  direction.  The  interest  in  games  of  all  kinds 
has  increased  so  much,  and  so  much  attention  is 
devoted  to  training  boys  in  the  preparatory  schools 
and   afterward  in  college,  that  we  have  not  only  a 


A   SERMON    ON    LAWN   TENNIS. 


47 


very  large  class  of  trained  athletes,  but  boys  have 
learned  how  important  good  "coaching"  is.  They 
go  into  the  game  more  earnestly  than  they  used. 
Owing  to  the  large 
n  u  m  b  c  r  of  tourna- 
ments, they  see  the 
best  players,  and  they 
copy  their  styles.  Each 
has  some  one  whom 
he  looks  up  to  as  a 
model  of  what  good 
play  should  be. 

Now,  too,  they  play 
in  tournaments  them- 
selves ;  and  playing  in 
public,  they  are  more 
careful  as  to  their 
faults  and  peculiarities  than  they  used  to  be  in 
private,  for  fear  of  seeming  ridiculous.  In  this  way 
they  learn  to  play  well  at  an  earlier  age  than  any 
class  before  them.  Thus  they  have  their  agility 
and  their  knowledge  of  the  game  at  the  same  time. 
Heretofore  I  used  to  say  that  the  trouble  with  the 
game  was,  that  few  had  brains  enough  to  play  it 
properly  until  they  got  too  old  to  play  it  at  all. 


With  no  Side  Twist. 


48  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

This,  I  think,  is  no  longer  true ;  and  the  change 
is  due  to  the  improvement  of  the  boys.  For  in- 
stance, I  do  not  see  any  great  improvement  in  the 
best  players  in  the  past  few  years,  but  among  the 
middle-class  players  the  improvement  is  enormous. 
They  are  largely  young  players,  and  are  still  im- 
proving. The  number,  too,  of  good  players  has 
increased  very  much ;  and  in  the  first  class  itself 
there  are  twice  as  many  players  as  there  were  a 
few  years  ago. 

The  practical  part  of  all  this  discussion  is,  "  Can 
we  do  anything  to  help  the  advancement  of  young 
players  ?  "  Something  we  can  do  :  we  can  encour- 
age tournaments  between  the  different  schools,  etc. 
The  interscholastic  tournaments  held  at  Harvard, 
Yale,  and  Princeton  are  good  examples.  If  any  one 
doubts  the  value  of  this  system,  let  him  look  at  the 
success  of  the  foot-ball  competition  between  the  dif- 
ferent preparatory  schools  in  training  players  for 
Harvard.  Harvard  has  not  won  with  them,  but  that 
is  a  different  story. 

By  giving  tournaments,  we  help  the  boys  in 
several  ways.  They  get  used  to  matches,  a  very 
necessary  thing.  They  get  interested  in  the  game, 
and  their  ambition  is  aroused.     They  see  good  play 


50  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

and  good  players ;  and  they  meet  every  variety  of 
style,  instead  of  having  their  practice  confined  to 
playing  against  one  or  two  players  only. 

This  is  surely  good.  Can  we  now  add  any 
preaching  that  can  be  of  use  ?  I  hardly  know ;  I 
look  on  preaching  with  great  disrespect.  Few 
listen,  few  believe  you,  and  fewer  still  take  the 
trouble  to  try  to  put  the  teaching  into  practice. 
There  are,  however,  some  general  instructions 
so  simple  that  it  would  seem  folly  to  write 
them,  if  it  were  not  that  they  are  constantly  lost 
siorht  of. 

Take  a  boy  at  the  beginning.  Probably  he  can- 
not get  one  of  the  most  expensive  rackets.  It 
really  does  not  matter.  Some  of  the  cheaper  ones 
are  practically  as  good,  but  it  matters  a  great  deal 
what  sort  of  a  cheap  one  he  gets.  Let  him  get 
one  of  fourteen  or  fourteen  and  a  quarter  ounces, 
a  little  lig-hter  in  the  head  than  most  rackets  are 
made.  Have  nothing  fancy  about  it,  no  gold  braid, 
no  curious  stringing,  no  fluted  handle.  It  needs 
to  be  well  balanced  and  well  strunof,  and  that  is 
enough.  As  to  flannels  and  shoes,  there  is  nothing 
to  be  said,  except  that  the  shoe  should  be  comfort- 
able  and   solid   enouofh  to  hold  the  foot  toofether. 


A    SERMON    ON    LAWN    TENNIS.  5 1 

else  there  is  a  good  deal  of  danger  of  straining  the 
foot. 

As  to  balls,  I  do  not  know  what  to  say.  Balls 
are  very  expensive,  and  last  a  very  short  time.  A 
boy  cannot  expect  to  have  new  balls  every  day  ;  and 
if  he  is  in  earnest,  and  does  not  mind  taking  trouble 
in  order  to  learn,  the  best  thing  that  he  can  do  is 
to  practise  with  two  or  three  balls  only.  They  will 
need  a  good  deal  of  chasing,  but  he  will  always 
have  them  in  o-ood  condition.  If  he  brings  out  a 
boxful,  they  will  all  suffer  more  or  less  the  first  day, 
and  he  will  have  to  use  poor  balls  till  he  can  get 
another  box.  It  is  a  orreat  mistake  to  use  uncov- 
ered  balls  or  last  year's  balls.  Neither  are  of  the 
sliorhtest  use. 

No  advice  can  be  given  about  courts.  One  must 
play  on  the  best  available. 

To  begin  with,  the  player  ma)'  make  up  his 
mind  that  it  will  take  a  long  time  to  play  even 
tolerably  well.  The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  learn 
to  hit  the  ball  straight —  that  is,  with  no  side  twist. 
The  ball  should  go  directly  down  the  court.  If  the 
player  stands  on  the  central  line,  the  ball  should 
drop  on  the  central  line  on  the  other  side  of  the 
net.     This  is   the  very  essence  of  a  good  stroke. 


52 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


If  you  can  play  straight,  you  can  tell  where  the  ball 
is  going.  If  you  have  a  curve  on  it,  you  will  be 
constantly  hitting  out  of  court  on  the  side,  or  else 
bringing  the  ball  into  the  middle  of  the  court  when 
you  intended  it  to  go  down 
the  side  line. 

Next  in  importance  is  the 
length  of  the  court.  You 
must  learn  to  hit  from  one 
base  line  to  the  other ;  that 
is,  to  hit  from  the  back  of 
your  own  court  and  make  the 
ball  drop  about  a  yard  from 
the  other  base  line.  A  mo- 
ment's thought  will  show  that 
if  the  ball  goes  only  as  far  as 
the  service  line,  your  oppo- 
nent can  easily  come  forward 
to  volley. 

These  two  points  are  the  foundation  of  the  game. 
As  to  the  service,  don't  bother  about  it.  A  very 
fast  service  is  terrible  to  bad  players ;  but  good  ones 
return  it  easily.  Wait  till  you  play  fairly  well  before 
you  try  for  a  very  fast  service.  Next  comes  the  vol- 
ley.   Wait  till  you  have  brought  the  ground  strokes 


A  Girl  "  Champion. " 


■  iJ 


^'"riiiWs. 


'A  Rest  In  the  Qame,' 


A   SERMON    ON    LAWN   TENNIS.  55 

under  control  before  you  begin  to  practise  much 
volleying.  When  you  do  begin,  keep  one  point 
clearly  in  mind :  you  must  always  hit  the  ball.  You 
must  not  let  it  hit  your  racket.  The  only  exception 
is  when  you  are  close  to  the  net ;  then  you  may 
block  the  ball,  if  your  opponent  is  far  back.  Don't 
try  any  wild  "  smashing."  Hit  quietly,  but  always 
hard.  As  a  principle,  never  hit  a  ball  easy  ;  always 
make  a  real  stroke.  One  word  more.  Don't  play 
very  long  at  a  time.  Three  or  four  sets  are  enough. 
Always  play  with  a  better  player  if  you  can,  and 
take  odds  enough  to  make  him  work  as  hard  as  he 
can. 

Win  quietly ;  lose  quietly,  and  don't  get  angry. 


HOW  TO   TRAIN   A   CREW. 

BY    WILLIAM   A.    BANCROFT, 

Captain  of  tlie  Harvard  Crews  of  \%-]t  to  1879. 

BEFORE  training  comes  the  selection  of  men. 
Too  orreat  care  cannot  be  taken  that  the 
members  of  a  crew  are,  first,  physically  sound;  and, 
second,  anatomically  fitted  for  rowing.  Men  whose 
organs  are  unsound,  not  only  are  likely  to  sufifer 
themselves,  but,  when  they  break  down,  new  men 
are  taken  in  their  places,  and  there  is  lost  the  uni- 
son of  a  crew — the  result  of  weeks  of  preparation. 
The  work  must  be  done  over,  if  there  is  time.  If 
not,  the  crew  is  weakened  to  that  extent.  Men 
should  have  a  suitable  stature  and  suitable  propor- 
tions. Men  too  tall  or  too  short,  men  with  ex- 
tremely long  or  short  arms  or  legs,  conform  only 
with  great  difficulty,  if  at  all,  to  the  movements  of 
the  rest  of  the  crew.  Men  from  five  feet  eicrht 
inches  to  six  feet  in  height,  and  weighing,  without 
clothing,  from  one  hundred  and  fifty  to  one  hundred 

56 


HOW    TO   TRAIN    A    CREW.  57 

and  eighty-five  pounds  when  in  racing  condition, 
are  generally  the  best.  There  is,  of  course,  great 
choice  in  fibre.  Some  consideration  also  should  be 
given  to  temperament  and  disposition.  A  man 
should  have  resolution,  spirit,  good  judgment,  amia- 
bility, and  equanimity.  A  good  crew  must  be  essen- 
tially harmonious,  and  this  involves  adaptability  on 
the  part  of  all  of  its 
members  to  each  other. 
Boat-racing  should  not 
be  undertaken,  as  a  rule, 
by  those  under  seven- 
teen years  of  age  ;  and 
it  would  be  safer  to  be- 

"0/1  the  Machine." 

gm  at  eighteen  or  even 

nineteen.  The  sport  is  a  violent  one,  and  is  likely 
to  be  too  exacting  for  persons  in  mid-youth.  The 
organs  are  not  then  sufficiently  powerful ;  and  an 
arrested  development,  even  if  nothing  more  seri- 
ous, may  result. 

Training  involves  the  amounts  and  kinds  of 
exercise,  food  and  drink,  sleep  and  bathing  for  the 
body,  besides  the  occupation  of  the  mind  and  its 
discipline. 

And  first  of  exercise:  — 


58  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

If  the  persons  selected  have  the  time  at  their  dis- 
posal, it  is  always  better,  before  beginning  to  row,  to 
practise  for  a  week  or  two  several  forms  of  exercise, 
for  the  purpose  of  strengthening  certain  muscles  of 
the  back  and  legs,  as  well  as  the  wrist  muscles,  and 
to  get  the  heart  and  lungs  accustomed  to  greater 
activity.  As  the  crew,  which  at  this  time  should 
contain  at  least  two  more  men  than  the  number  of 
oars  to  be  pulled,  must  conform  to  the  powers  of  its 
weakest  member,  and  as  it  is  not  prudent  to  begin 
by  taking  a  large  amount  of  exercise,  at  first  not 
over  twenty  minutes  ought  to  be  spent  on  gymna- 
sium apparatus  and  in  calisthenic  exercises,  and  not 
over  a  mile  ought  to  be  covered  in  walking  and 
running,  three-quarters  of  ^lich  should  be  walk- 
ing. This  exercise  ought  to  be  gradually  increased 
until  thirty-five  or  forty  minutes  are  spent  in  the 
gymnasium,  and  a  run  of  a  mile  and  a  half  at  a  pace 
of  seven  or  eight  miles  an  hour  is  taken. 

The  gymnasium  exercises  should  consist  of  work 
on  vertical  bars,  on  wrist  weights,  to  some  extent  on 
arm  and  chest  weights,  and  in  doing  the  military 
"  setting  up"  exercises,  such  as  are  now  prescribed 
for  the  army  of  the  United  States,  especially  the 
exercise  which  consists  in  lowering  and  raising  the 


How    TO    TRAIN    A    CREW. 


^9 


body  by  bending  the  legs  at  the  knees,  or  "  squat- 
ting." The  gymnasium  exercises  ought  to  be  done 
by  all  together  at  the  word  of  command,  both  for 
the  sake  of  acquiring  uniformity  of  movement,  and 
also  of  acquiring  a  habit  of  obedience.  A  crew  is 
a  machine.  Its  parts  must  fit  each  other,  and  the 
whole  must  start  and  move  and  stop  as  directed. 


\'l'i.y     ^r-  j^^  •' Setting-up"  Motion. 

These  gymnasium  exercises  for  the  first  two  or 
three  years  of  rowing  should  be  kept  up  daily,  until 
within  about  six  weeks  of  a  race,  usually  from  ten  to 
fifteen  minutes  beinor  oriven  to  them,  even  after  the 
actual  rowing  has  begun ;  and  the  runs  should  be 


6o  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

kept  up  until  nearly  as  late  a  date.  During  the  six 
weeks  or  thereabouts  immediately  preceding  a  race, 
a  smart  walk  of  a  mile  or  more,  according  to  the 
time  available,  ought  to  be  substituted  for  the  ex- 
ercises and  the  runnings.  For  students  and  those 
whose  vocations  are  sedentary,  it  is  a  good  plan  to 
take  the  walk  immediately  upon  rising,  and,  while 
perspiring,  follow  it  with  a  quick  shower  or  plunge 
bath,  and  a  rub-down  before  breakfast.  If  there  is 
time,  instead  of  this,  a  longer  walk  at  a  less  rapid 
pace  may  be  taken  during  the  day.  Overdoing, 
however,  is  to  be  avoided.  What  a  given  crew  can 
do  must  be  learned  by  experience  ;  and  individuals 
should  be  relieved,  if  it  is  found  that  they  are  doing 
too  much.  Especially  as  the  day  of  the  race  ap- 
proaches, care  should  be  taken  that  no  one  is  over- 
trained. If  there  is  doubt,  a  given  exercise  had 
best  be  omitted. 

The  food  should  consist  of  meat  and  fish,  vegeta- 
bles, light  puddings,  and  fruit ;  the  drink  of  pure 
water,  and  good  milk  if  wanted.  Pastry,  confec- 
tions, alcoholic  drinks,  and  tobacco  should  be 
prohibited.  The  food  should  be  abundant  and 
wholesome.  Steaks,  chops,  or  broiled  chicken,  with 
fish  for  breakfast ;  soup,  fish,  and  a  roast  for  dinner 


HOW   TO   TRAIN   A   CREW.  63 

in  the  middle  of  the  day  ;  and  a  cold  roast  or  break- 
fast dishes  for  supper.  The  roasts  should  not  be 
overdone,  but  should  be  suitably  cooked  so  as  to 
retain  the  juices.  The  best  of  vegetables  should  be 
selected,  and  fruit  in  its  season.  The  bread  should 
be  neither  too  fresh  nor  too  stale.  In  short,  all  these 
articles  of  food  should  be  prepared  as  they  are  at 
a  first-class  hotel.  The  best  of  good,  wholesome 
food,  and  that  in  abundance,  is  needed.  There 
ought  to  be  no  regret  if  weight  is  not  lost,  provided 
each  man  does  his  share  of  the  work  in  the  boat. 
Good  food  and  plenty  of  exercise  strengthen  the 
muscles  ;  and  if  this  process  is  going  on,  an  increase 
in  weight  is  of  little  moment. 

The  oarsman  should  have  all  the  sleep  he  wants; 
and  between  the  ages  of  eighteen  and  twenty-five 
he  will  need  about  nine  hours  in  bed,  if  he  does 
honest  work,  in  the  boat.  He  should  sleep  in  a 
well-ventilated  room,  and  on  a  hair  mattress  and 
pillow,  with  no  more  covering  than  is  necessary  for 
warmth,  and  this  will  not  be  much.  His  sleep 
should  be  taken  at  regular  hours.  Besides  the 
morning  bath,  one  other  cold  bath  daily  may  be 
taken  after  the  row,  or  after  the  harder  row  if  there 
are  two;  but  the  bath  must  be  taken  while  perspi- 


64  'fHE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

ration  is  going  on,  that  is,  at  once  after  the  row  is 
done.  The  bath  should  not  be  prolonged,  and 
should  be  followed  by  a  vigorous  rubbing  down 
with  a  dry  towel.  This  rubbing  may  advantage- 
ously be  followed  by  another  rubbing  of  the 
limbs  by  the  hands  of  an  attendant,  whose  hands 
are  moistened  with  spirits  for  the  purpose.  Care, 
however,  should  be  taken  to  do  the  rubbing  in  a 
room  sufficiently  warm  and  free  from  draughts  to 
avoid  taking  cold.  If,  for  any  reason,  the  oarsman 
has  stopped  perspiring  before  taking  a  bath,  the 
bath  should  be   in  warm  water. 

The  mind  should  have  a  rational  occupation. 
Freedom  from  extraordinary  care  or  unusual  excite- 
ment should  be  insured.  Regularity  of  both  bodily 
and  mental  habits  should  be  observed.  While  in 
the  boat  the  closest  attention  should  be  given  by 
each  man  to  his  performance,  and  time  enough 
should  be  taken  when  out  of  the  boat  to  understand 
and  to  master  what  is  required  of  him.  If  there  is 
time,  and  the  sole  object  in  view  is  to  win  a  race, 
much  time  may  profitably  be  spent  by  every  mem- 
ber of  the  crew  in  perfecting,  by  discussion  or 
otherwise,  the  details  of  the  stroke,  or  of  the  work 
of  individuals,  or  of  the  crew  as  a  whole.     At  all 


HOW    TO    TRAIN   A    CREW.  65' 

events,  the  mind  should  be  kept  healthy  by  the 
contemplation  and  the  consideration  of  none  but 
wholesome  subjects. 

While  there  should  be  a  regularity  in  matters 
of  food,  sleep,  and  habits,  and,  in  general,  in  exer- 
cise, the  latter  should  not  be  allowed  to  become 
irksome  through  its  monotony.  It  is  better  to 
give  up  rowing  occasionally  for  a  day,  and  substi- 
tute some  other  exercise  of  a  recreative  character, 
or  rest  altogether ;  and,  if  the  preparation  for  a 
race  lasts  for  six  months,  a  vacation  of  a  week 
ought  to  be  taken  when  the  time  is  half  gone. 
But  even  then  exercise  ought  not  to  be  wholly 
abandoned  ;  and  the  rest  of  the  requirements,  those 
relating  to  food,  drink,  sleep,  etc.,  should  be 
observed. 

Few  races  ought  to  be  undertaken,  and  none  by 
new  men,  without  at  least  three  months  of  prepara- 
tion. By  this  is  not  meant  that,  after  a  race  is  over, 
a  man's  habits  may  be  radically  changed.  The 
true  oarsman  never  essentially  changes  his  habits. 
Unless  his  concerns  prevent,  he  will  always  get 
plenty  of  sleep  at  regular  hours,  will  eat  nothing 
but  the  kinds  of  food  described  above,  will  not 
become  a  slave  to  any  appetite,  and  will   not  give 


66 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


up  athletic  exercise.  Such  a  man  will  be,  in  a 
sense,  always  in  condition  ;  without  inconvenience, 
he  will  readily  assume  the  more  exacting  obli- 
gations necessary  to  prepare  for  a  race.  A  crew 
of  such  men  may,  of  course,  prepare  for  a  contest 
in  less  than  three  months'  time ;  but  even  they  will 
do  well  to  give  as  long  a  period  as  three  months, 

if  the  race  is  to  be  any  but 
a  very  short  one. 

The  stroke  to  be  rowed 
will  depend  somewhat  upon 
circumstances.  If  it  should 
happen  that  there  be  avail- 
able for  the  stroke  oarsman 
of  the  crew,  a  man  who  has 
already  acquired  a  smooth,  symmetrical,  regular,  and 
effective  movement,  it  may  be  expedient  to  teach 
the  rest  of  the  crew  his  stroke,  no  matter  what  the 
style.  Good  results  have  been  obtained  from  such 
a  course.  Good  crew  shell-rowing,  no  matter  what 
the  style  of  stroke,  has  certain  requirements.  The 
shell  must  be  rowed  so  that  it  v;ill  not  roll  from 
side  to  side ;  so  that  it  will  not  sink  unnecessarily 
either  at  bow  or  stern,  when  the  weight  of  the  crew 
shifts  as  it  is  moved  with  the  seats.     The  oar-blades 


Position  of  "  Strolte." 


HOW   TO    TRAIN    A    CREW.  67 

« 

must  take  the  water  on  the  "  full  reach"  at  the  very 
farthest  point  to  which  they  are  carried,  without 
"  clipping "  or  rowing  the  first  part  of  the  stroke 
in  the  air.  They  must  take  the  water  also  without 
"  backing "  it,  or  throwing  it  towards  the  bow. 
They  must  leave  the  water  at  the  end  of  the  stroke 
without  "  slivering,"  or  pulling  water  up  as  they 
are  taken  out ;  that  is,  the  blades  must  take  and 
leave  the  water  so  that  the  least  possible  retar- 
dation shall  be  given  to  the  onward  movement  of 
the  boat,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  said,  they  must  be 
put  in  and  taken  out  "  clean  "  and  "  smooth." 

After  the  blades  are  taken  out  of  the  water  at  the 
end  of  the  stroke,  they  must  be  returned  to  the  "  full 
reach  "  again  without  touching  the  water ;  for  the 
friction  of  draofSfing:  them  along-  the  surface  tends  to 
hold  the  boat  back.  The  blades,  of  course,  ought 
to  be  dipped  together,  taken  out  together,  feathered 
together  at  a  uniform  height,  and  turned  again 
together  for  another  stroke.  Again,  there  should 
be  uniformity  of  movement  inside  the  boat ;  indeed, 
unless  there  is  such  uniformity,  there  is  little  likeli- 
hood of  uniformity  of  movement  outside.  The 
backs,  therefore,  of  a  crew  that  rows  well  will 
always  be   parallel,   the  legs  will   move  simultane- 


68  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

ously,  and  so  will  the  seats,  and  the  arms  will  be 
drawn  in  at  the  same  time,  the  wrists  dropped 
together  at  the  finish  of  the  stroke,  the  arms 
extended  again  at  the  same  time,  and  the  hands 
will  be  turned  simultaneously  on  the  full  reach  to 
begin  the  stroke.  All  these  requirements  are  com- 
mon to  good  crew  shell-rowing,  and,  when  lacking, 
are  indications  of  a  faulty  stroke.  But  none  of  these 
faults,  however,  may  belong  to  any  one  of  several 
crews,  no  two  of  which  are  rowing  the  same  stroke. 
There  may  be  good  rowing,  therefore,  under  various 
styles  of  stroke.  Still,  some  one  must  be  adopted. 
When  no  other  stroke  has  been  adopted,  the  fol- 
lowing may  be  used  :  Assuming  the  boat  to  be 
stationary  and  the  oarsman  to  be  at  a  "  full  reach," 
arms  extended,  back  straightened  from  its  lowest 
extremity  and  inclined,  seat  as  far  aft  as  it  is 
intended  to  be  moved,  blade  in  the  water  turned  for 
the  stroke  and  just  covered,  the  shoulders  squared 
and  held  down  and  back,  the  neck  and  head  in  pro- 
longation of  the  back,  the  wrist  of  the  hand  next  to 
the  rowlock  slightly  con  vexed,  and  that  hand  resting 
diagonally  upon  the  oar  handle,  the  legs  opened 
slightly,  but  symmetrically,  enough  to  receive 
between    the    thighs   the   lower   front   part   of  the 


HOW    to    TRAIN    A    CREW. 


69 


trunk,  and  the  boat  resting  evenly  upon  the  water, 
the  stroke  is  begun  by  swaying  the  trunk  back  as 
though  pivoted  at  the  seat  until  it  has  reached  the 
vertical  position,  then  the  legs  are  straightened  out 
with  vigor,  the  seat  moving  back  with  the  shoulders, 
the  hands  being  kept  at  such  a  height  that  the  blade 
will  remain  just  covered,  until  the  seat  has  been 
moved  toward  the  bow  to  its  limit,  and  the  trunk  has 
swung  just  a  trifle  beyond  the  vertical.  The  stroke 
is  finished  by  drawing  in  the  arms  until  the  hands 
touch  the  body,  when,  by  dropping  them  a  bit,  and, 
at  the  same  time  slightly  turning  the  wrist,  the  blade 
is  taken  out  of  the  water.  Care  should  be  taken 
to  keep  the  blade  just  covered  in  making  this 
finish.  To  return  to  the 
"full  reach"  again  the 
hands  continue  moving, 
and  are  shot  out  parallel 
with  the  surface  of  the 
water  until  the  arms  are 
straightened,  the  trunk  is 
swung  forward,  and  almost 
at  the  same  time  the  seat  is  started  aft,  while  the 
trunk  continues  to  swing  until  everything  gets  to 
the  "  full  reach"  simultaneously  and  is  ready  to  be- 


In  Single  Scull. 


no  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

gin  another  stroke.  Nothing  but  practice,  of  course, 
and  the  assistance  of  an  experienced  "  coach,"  will 
enable  a  crew  to  row  smoothly,  gracefully,  and 
effectively  the  stroke  here  attempted  to  be  de- 
scribed. The  separate  parts  of  the  stroke  are  given 
as  though  they  were  independent  movements,  in- 
stead of  forming,  as  they  do,  one  continuous  but 
complicated  movement.  At  the  beginning  of  the 
stroke,  or  at  the  "  catch  "  as  it  is  called,  the  shoul- 
ders should  be  driven  back  vigorously  and  rapidly, 
care  being  taken  not  to  make  the  motion  a  jerky 
one  by  burying  the  oar-blade  too  deeply,  and  thus 
stopping  the  movement  of  the  shoulders.  At  the 
finish  the  most  difficult  part  of  the  movement  to  be 
acquired  is  a  rapid  "  shoot"  of  the  arms  away  from 
the  body,  without  a  jarring  motion  by  which  the 
hands  are  either  sent  down  into  the  lap  with  a 
violent  thump,  or  else  the  shoulders  are  brought 
forward  with  a  jerk.  The  "catch"  and  the  "  shoot" 
give  no  litde  trouble  to  beginners;  but,  when  once 
mastered  by  a  crew,  it  is  believed  that,  other  things 
being  equal,  no  stroke  without  them  is  so  effective. 
Every  motion  must  be  such  as  to  waste  no  energy. 
After  the  arms  are  shot  out,  the  trunk,  which  scarcely 
stops  in  changing  direction,  should  not  be  rushed 


How    TO   TRAIN    A   CREW.  *Jl 

towards  the  "  full  reach,"  but  should  follow  at  a  rel- 
atively moderate  pace  the  "  shoot "  of  the  arms. 
Especially,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  let  the  trunk 
drop  down  on  the  "  full  reach  "  with  a  jar  or  thump, 
and  pains  should  be  taken  to  have  the  hands 
high  enough  as  they  approach  the  "full  reach"  to 
brinor  the  blade  as  close  to  the  water  as  it  can  be 
brought,  without  "backing  water,"  to  begin  the 
stroke. 

The   tricks   of  watermanship,   or   of  rowing   the 
boat   "  on   an    even    keel "  as  it   is  called,   that    is, 


A  Turn  to  Starboard. 


without  its  inclining  either  to  port  or  starboard, 
can  most  of  them  be  learned  only  by  experience. 
It  is  a  general  rule,  when  the  boat  inclines  to  port 
during  the  feather,  for  the  starboard  men  to  lower 
their  hands  and   for  the  port   men  to  raise  theirs, 


7^  THE    iBOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

and  vice  versa.  If  the  boat  rolls  to  port  during 
the  stroke,  the  port  men  must  pry  her  over,  done 
by  lifting,  as  it  were,  their  oar-handles,  and  vice 
versa.  Every  muscle  should,  of  course,  be  trained 
to  be  under  absolute  control,  so  as  to  adjust  itself 
to  the  various  conditions  of  wind,  wave,  and  cur- 
rent as  they  appear,  to  anticipate,  and,  by  the 
necessary  motions,  to  counteract  their  effect  upon 
the  "trim"  of  the  boat.  Power  must  be  applied 
vigorously  at  one  instant ;  at  the  next,  it  must  be 
taken  off  so  as  to  maintain  the  "  beat "  or  rhythm 
of  the  stroke. 

It  is  best  to  teach  a  novice  the  motions  of  the 
trunk,  legs,  and  arms  upon  a  rowing-machine. 
The  muscles  are  then  accustomed  to  many  of  the 
requirements  of  the  stroke,  so  that  when,  later, 
the  beofinner  is  seated  in  a  boat,  there  is  not  so 
much  to  be  learned  at  once.  Before  he  is  allowed 
to  row  with  a  crew,  he  should  be  taught  first,  in  a 
pair-oared  boat  of  sufficient  steadiness  not  to  roll, 
the  proper  method  of  handling  an  oar.  From  the 
pair-oar,  the  members  of  the  crew  should  next  be 
seated  in  a  steady  barge,  and  there  be  taught  to 
row  "  together."  Lastly,  the  shell  should  be 
entered.      In  the  meantime,  the  way  to  lift  boats, 


HOW    TO   TRAIN    A    CREW.  73 

to  carry  them,  to  put  them  into  the  water  and  to 
take  them  out  should  be  taught ;  also  the  way 
to  get  in  and  to  get  out  of  a  boat  ;  the  way  to 
turn  a  boat  without  straining  it,  as  well  as  how 
to  "hold"  it  and  to  "back"  it.  A  shell  must  be 
used  with  the  greatest  of  care,  in  order  that  its 
lines  may  be  kept. 

In  placing  the  crew  in  a  boat,  care  should  be 
taken  to  select  for  the  stroke  oarsman  a  man  of 
quick  motions,  clear  head,  and  self-possession, 
plucky,  and  of  endurance.  He  should  be  able 
to  set  a  long  stroke,  the  pace  of  which  he  can 
regulate  without  throwing  the  crew  out  of  time, 
and  he  should  have  power  enough  to  "  drive  "  the 
rest  of  the  crew  in  a  spurt.  The  next  man  behind 
the  stroke  oarsman  should  be  a  strono-er  man 
than  he,  and  one  who  rows  a  stroke  quite  as  long, 
and  who  can  keep  in  perfect  time  with  him.  The 
weiofht  of  the  crew  should  be  so  arrang^ed  that 
the  boat  will  never  "  trim  down  by  the  head," 
that  is,  sink  lower  in  the  bow  than  in  the  stern  ; 
and,  as  nearly  as  possible,  the  strength  of  the  men 
on  one  side  should  equal  the  strength  of  those 
on  the  other. 

There    are    two    objects    in    training    a    crew  — 


74  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

one  to  enable  it  to  acquire  an  effective  stroke, 
the  other  to  enable  its  members  to  be  in  the  very 
best  physical  condition  at  the  hour  of  the  race. 
The  first  consideration  should  always  yield  to  the 
second. 


^ 


CRICKET  AS   PLAYED    IN   AMERICA. 

BY    RALPH    CRACKNELL. 

Of  the  Boston  A thUtic  Association  and  Longwood  Cricket  Club. 

ENGLISH  and  American  boys  are  pretty  much 
the  same  kind  of  fellows  in  their  love  of  out- 
door sports ;  and  in  neither  country  does  a  boy  get 
into  knickerbockers,  without  beginning  at  once  to 
learn  to  play  ball. 

The  very  small  boy  is  usually  content  to  begin 
by  playing  "  catch  ;  "  that  is,  tossing  the  ball  back 
and  forth  ;  but  it  is  only  a  short  time  before  we  find 
him  trying  to  follow  the  example  of  the  older  boys, 
and  play  the  national  game  —  in  America,  base-ball; 
in  England,  cricket. 

And  as  soon  as  he  becomes  a  pretty  fair  player, 
we  find  our  boy  joining  some  small  club  ;  next, 
playing  on  his  school  team ;  then  on  his  college 
nine  or  eleven,  and  all  the  while  Sfoino-  to  see  grames 
between  the  best  players  of  the  great  teams,  study- 

75 


76  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

ing  the  fine  points  of  the  game,  learning  the  science 
of  play,  and  unconsciously  getting  the  good  health 
which  comes  from  being  in  the  open  air,  and  which 
is  likely  to  carry  him  through  life. 

The  difference  between  the  games  of  the  two 
countries,  is,  however,  that  cricket  means  much 
more  to  the  English  boy  than  base-ball  does  to  the 
American. 

This  follows  naturally ;  for  while  our  American 
game  has  been  in  existence  only  about  thirty-five 
years,  cricket  has  been  the  English  national  sport 
for  two  centuries ;  and  where,  with  us,  our  best 
players  of  base-ball  are  men  who  make  a  business 
of  playing,  and  are  paid  large  salaries,  in  England 
the  greatest  cricket  teams  are  made  up  very  largely 
of  amateurs,  it  being  seldom  that  in  one  game  more 
than  two  or  three  professional  players  will  be  found. 

It  is  this  strictly  amateur  element  of  the  game  of 
cricket  that  has  won,  and  kept  for  it,  its  popularity 
in  England,  where  the  hero  of  the  hour  in  school, 
college,  county,  and  international  matches  is  the  one 
who  has  made  a  big  score,  or  broken  through  the 
defence  of  his  opponents  by  skilful  bowling. 

Many  boys  will  be  surprised  to  learn  that  the  first 
game   of  cricket   played   in   America,   of  which  we 


CRICKET   AS    PLAYED    IN    AMERICA.  77 

have  record,  was  between  eleven  colonists  and  an 
equal  number  of  Londoners,  in  1751,  and  we  take 
pleasure  in  recording  the  fact  that  the  "cockneys" 
were  beaten. 

In  Boston,  in  1809,  the  first  organized  club  was 
started  by  a  number  of  Englishmen,  under  the  name 
of  the  Boston  Cricket  Club ;  and  just  twenty-one 
years  afterward  the  St.  George's  Club,  of  New 
York,  was  founded,  and  began  the  work  of  foster- 
ing and  encouraging  the  progress  of  the  game. 

Cricket  is  so  little  understood  by  the  many  to 
whom  base-ball  and  tennis  have  been  the  principal 
summer  sports,  that  it  may  be  well  to  give  a  brief 
outline  of  its  objects,  and  the  way  it  is  played. 

A  field  as  large  as  possible,  in  which  the  grass  is 
kept  as  carefully  clipped  and  level  as  a  lawn,  is  the 
ideal  cricket  ground.  Near  the  centre  of  the  field, 
the  pitch,  as  it  is  called,  is  selected,  and  the  wickets 
are  placed  twenty- two  yards  apart,  opposite  and 
parallel  to  each  other. 

It  must  be  understood  that  the  "  pitch  "  alluded 
to  is  the  space  which  corresponds  to  the  space 
between  the  pitcher  and  catcher  in  base-ball. 

Each  wicket  consists  of  three  round  wooden 
sticks,  called  "  stumps,"  which  are  driven  into  the 


78 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


t^^^s^^ 


ground,  and  just  near  enough  together  to  prevent 
the  ball  from  passing  between  them,  while  their 
heio-ht  must  not  exceed  twenty-seven  inches,  and 
their  total  width,  when  ready  for  attack,  not  more 
than  eiofht  inches. 

On  top  of  each  wicket  are  placed  two  small  sticks 
of  wood,  called  "  bails  ;  "  and 
so  lightly  are  they  poised 
that  at  ihe  sliorhtest  dis- 
turbance  of  the  wicket  they 
fall  to  the  ground. 

The  bowler's  crease,  cor- 
responding  in    base-ball    to 
the   pitcher's  box,  from   be- 
hind   which    the    ball    must 
be    bowled,    is    in    line   with 
the   wicket.      Another    line, 
four    feet    from    the    wicket 
and  parallel  with  it,  is  called 
the   popping  crease  ;   and  the  batsman,  to  be  safe, 
must  have  some  part  of  his  body  or  his  bat  inside 
this  line  when  the  ball  is  in  play. 

The  bat  used  is  made  of  willow,  with  a  spliced 
handle,  usually  of  cane.  It  is  nearly  flat,  and  not 
more  than  four  and  a  quarter  inches  wide,  or  more 


Ready  for  the  Attack. 


CRICKET    AS    PLAYED    IN    AMERICA.  79 

than  thirty-eight  inches  long.  The  ball  has  a  basis 
of  cork,  and  is  bound  with  leather,  and  weighs  be- 
tween five  and  one-half  and  five  and  three-quarters 
ounces. 

A  match  is  played  between  two  sides,  of  eleven 
players  each,  unless  otherwise  agreed ;  each  side 
has  two  innings  except  in  one-day  matches,  when 
one  innings  each  decides  the  contest. 

The  chance  of  innings  is  decided  by  tossing. 
The  batting  side  sends  two  men  to  the  wickets,  and, 
as  each  man  gets  out,  another  replaces  him  until  the 
whole  side  is  out;  one  man  beinsj  "not  out,"  be- 
cause  by  the  rules  of  the  game  there  must  be  a 
batsman  at  each  wicket. 

The  side  which  takes  the  field  selects  two  bowlers, 
one  of  whom  delivers  four,  five,  or  six  balls  as  pre- 
viously arranged. 

The  umpire,  at  the  bowler's  wicket,  now  calls, 
"  over."  The  field  then  changfes  to  suit  the  bowler 
from  the  opposite  end,  and  he  delivers  the  sarhe 
number  of  balls,  when  "  over"  is  called  by  the  other 
umpire,  and  the  field  changes  again,  and  so  on. 

The  bowler's  object  is  to  hit  the  wicket ;  or  he 
is  to  bowl  such  a  ball  that  the  batsman  hits  it  in  the 
air,  and  is  caught  by  a  fielder,  or  is  coaxed  outside 


8o 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


of  the  popping  crease,  when,  missing  the  ball,  the 
wicket  is  knocked  down  by  the  wicket  keeper,  who 
corresponds  to  the  catcher  in  base-ball,  and  the 
batsman  is  stumped  out. 

The  batsman's  object  is  to  hit  the  ball  through 
the  fielders,  or  in  such  a  location  as  to  give  no 
chance  for  a  catch,   and    score  a  run.      A  run   is 


'How's  that?"  —  Stumped  Out. 


scored  as  often  as  the  batsmen,  after  a  hit,  or  at  any 
time  while  the  ball  is  in  play,  shall  have  crossed, 
and  made  good  their  ground,  from  end  to  end.  If 
caught  between  the  wickets  while  running,  or  if  at 
any  time  the  batsman  while  in  play  is  out  of  his 
ground,  and  his  wicket  be  struck  down  by  the  ball 
after  touching  any  fieldsman,  he  is  "  run  out." 
With  a  few  minor  rules  added,  this  is  the  way 


CRICKET    AS    PLAYED    IN    AMERICA.  8 1 

in  which  the  game  is  played  in  England  and 
America. 

The  placing  of  the  field,  which  is  done  by  the 
bowler  or  the  captain  of  the  team,  requires  the 
greatest  judgment,  so  that  the  kind  of  ball  delivered 
receives  the  support  it  should  by  the  fielders  when 
hit  by  the  batsman.  The  field  can  be  changed  at 
any  time  during  an  "  over." 

The  difference  between  bowling  and  pitching  is 
that  the  ball  must  not  be  thrown. 

The  arm  must  be  straight  as  it  leaves  the  shoul- 
der. The  bowler  twists  and  curves  the  ball  from 
the  ground.  The  pitcher  makes  his  curves,  and 
shoots  in  the  air. 

Returning  to  the  history  of  cricket  in  America, 
we  find  that  in  1855,  with  the  formation  of  the 
Young  America  Club  in  Philadelphia,  the  game 
began  to  acquire  an  American  individuality  which 
has  since  marked  the  play  of  the  followers  of  the 
game  in  the  Quaker  City,  —  the  leading  cricket  city 
in  America.  It  has  been  called  the  "  home  of 
American  cricket."  Through  the  influence  of  the 
cricketers  of  that  city,  teams  from  England,  Ire- 
land, and  Australia  have  visited  this  country ;  and 
each  contest  has  marked  the  progress  of  the  game 


82  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

in  America,  until,  in  1891,  the  Philadelphians  gained 
a  brilliant  victory  over  a  stront^  eleven  of  English 
cricketers,  captained  by  Lord  Hawke.  A  few  years 
ago  an  eleven  of  university  men  from  Ireland  visited 
this  country,  and  won  one  match  with  Philadelphia, 
and  lost  one,  drawing  a  third.  The  Philadelphians, 
however,  did  not  play  in  their  best  form,  and  prob- 
ably underrated  their  opponents,  who  had  suffered 
defeat  in  Boston  when  playing  twelve  men  against 
fifteen. 

At  matches  like  those  last  mentioned,  the  attend- 
ance at  the  beautiful  Manheim  grounds  of  the  Ger- 
mantown  Cricket  Club,  where  the  international 
contests  are  played,  rivals  that  of  an  important 
match  in  England  or  Australia.  In  England  the  lar- 
gest attendance  on  record  is  at  a  match  played  last 
season  between  Surrey  and  Nottinghamshire,  when, 
in  the  three  days,  seventy-eight  thousand  people 
passed  through  the  gates.  In  Australia  the  record 
was  made  in  a  match  between  England  and  Aus- 
tralia, when  sixty  thousand  people  attended.  At 
Manheim,  during  the  three  days'  match  with  Lord 
Hawke's  eleven,  over  twenty-five  thousand  people 
visited  the  grounds ;  and  the  scene  was  as  pictur- 
esque and  as  animated  as  can  be  witnessed  at  Lords 


CRICKET   AS    PLAYED    IN    AMERICA. 


8S 


when  a  university  match,  or  the  crack  public  school 
match  between  Eton  and  Harrow,  is  being  played. 

The  patron  or  player  of  base-ball,  accustomed  to 
the  bare-looking  field,  with  its  tawdry  grand  stand, 
and  rows  of  uncomfortable  wooden  seats  called 
"  bleachers,"  would  be  agreeably  surprised  could  he 
see  the  beauty  and  luxury  which 
surround  the  game  of  cricket  as 
played  at  Manheim. 

Skirting  the  ground,  drawn 
up  in  the  welcome  shade  of 
tall,  graceful  trees,  are  coaches 
crowded  with  ladies  in  light  cos- 
tumes, many  wearing  the  colors 
of  their  favorite  elevens.  Inside 
these,  and  completely  surround- 
ing the  ground,  is  a  black  line 
of  spectators  ten  and  twelve 
deep,  with  here  and  there  groups  of  old  cricketers 
chatting  of  the  past  contests,  and  liberally  applaud- 
ing any  good  play.  In  the  middle,  is  the  arena 
where  the  battle  is  being  fought ;  the  white  flan- 
nels of  the  men  as  they  move  over  the  green 
turf,  the  constant  activity,  the  call  to  players,  and 
the   shouts   of  the   audience,   making   a   most    ani- 


Bowler  Delivering  a  Ball. 


86 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


mated  scene.  To  this,  are  added  the  beautiful 
paviHons,  crowded  from  floor  to  roof.  These  in- 
chide :  first,  the  great  main  paviHon,  used  for 
the  members  of  the  club,  the  players,  and  their 
,  ,,-  friends;  second,  the  ladies' 
'  pavilion,  which  is  like  a 
Newport  cottage,  and  here 
will  be  found  as  interesting 
and  delightful  a  gathering 
as  ever  graced  with  its  pres- 
^^  ence    any    afternoon   tea   at 

./f^ ..imiy        that    fashionable    summer    resort 
by  the  sea. 

Last,  but  by  no  means  least  in 
importance,  is  the  boys'  pavilion  ; 
and  here  is  one  of  the  chief  fac- 
tors in  making  cricket  in  Phila- 
delphia so  successful. 

Great  pains  are  taken  to  en- 
courage boys  to  take  up  the 
game.  They  have  this  pavilion,  and  their  owner- 
ship is  marked  by  the  sign  of  the  "  kid." 

The  custom  of  Philadelphians  in  training  up  the 
youth  to  love  the  game  of  cricket,  and  to  know  its 
fine  points,  has  placed  that  city  in  the  front  rank  of 


Blocking  a  Twist  from  Leg. 


CRICKET    AS    PLAYED    IN    AMERICA.  87 

the  cricket  cities  in  America.  Boston  has  a  good 
club  at  LongAvood,  and  several  Americans  play  the 
game  there ;  but  cricket  in  New  England  is  at  pres- 
ent played  principally  by  Englishmen.  The  same 
is  true  of  New  York,  Chicago,  and  Detroit,  and 
partly  so  of  Baltimore  and  Pittsburg. 

Not  until  the  schools  and  colleges  of  America 
take  up  the  game  will  it  become  universally  under- 
stood, and  reach  the  popularity  it  has  attained  in 
other  English-speaking  countries. 

St.  Paul's  School,  near  Concord,  N.  H.,  has  a 
beautiful  cricket  ground  ;  and  there  can  be  found 
the  same  interest,  rivalry,  and  skill,  as  in  a  large 
English  school.  Haverford  College  and  the  Uni- 
versity of  Pennsylvania  have  been  the  educational 
grounds  of  many  of  Philadelphia's  famous  cricketers. 
Harvard  has  struggled  manfully  to  support  an 
eleven,  and  Yale  in  some  years  has  attempted  to 
do  so,  but  the  interest  is  very  slight. 

With  its  rank  as  an  amateur  sport,  and  its  quali- 
ties of  good  nature,  courtesy,  and  forbearance,  which 
are  necessary  to  make  a  true  cricketer,  and  with  its 
opportunity  for  exercise  after  more  active  games 
have  been  given  up,  cricket  should,  in  America, 
receive  the  encouragement  it  can  justly  claim. 


GOLF:    THE    COMING   GAME. 

BY    HUGH    S.    HART. 

Of  the  Xavier  Athletic  Association. 

GOLF  is  the  coming  game.  Already  it  has 
more  than  kept  pace  with  its  younger  rivals; 
and,  from  a  purely  local  Scotch  game,  has  ex- 
tended its  fascinations  to  every  English-speaking 
community. 

That  the  international  popularity  of  golf,  wide- 
spread as  it  already  is,  will  go  on  increasing,  seems 
an  assured  fact,  as  it  is  based  on  certain  unique 
characteristics,  in  which  the  grand  old  game  has 
no  rivals. 

In  golfing,  the  mental,  as  well  as  the  physical 
and  muscular,  qualities  are  called  into  full  play. 
Like  the  surface  of  the  ideal  golf  link,  the  game 
presents  a  series  of  perpetual  changes.  Difficulty 
after  difficulty  arises,  which  the  player  is  called 
upon  to  surmount  by  cool  judgment  and  prompt 


GOLF  :     THE    COMING    GAME. 


89 


action.  The  same  complication  may  never  occur 
twice  in  identical  circumstances ;  therefore  the  in- 
genuity, skill,  and  intelligence  of  the  golfer  have 
unlimited  scope. 

Meanwhile,  although  the  violent,  intermittent 
exercise,  which  renders  base- 
ball, cricket,  and  foot-ball 
impracticable  to  all  save 
veritable  athletes,  can  al- 
ways be  avoided  in  golf; 
the  legrs  and  arms  are  called 
into  equable  and    invigorat- 


mo-  action. 

Unlike    almost    all    other 
out-door    o[ames,     o-olf    can 
be  played  all  the  year 
round.      This   is  even 
possible     during      the 
winter  months,   as    an 
admirable     grame     can 
be    insured    upon    the    snow    by    the    use    of    red 
balls. 

But  its  most  generally  appreciated  peculiarity 
is,  that  it  may  include  among  its  devotees  five 
of  Shakespeare's   "  Seven  ages  of  man,"  from  the 


«J.s\ 


A  Long  Stroke. 


90  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

immature  schoolboy  to  the  "  lean  and  slippered 
pantaloon ; "  while  the  girls,  too,  are  afforded  an 
equal  opportunity  to  develop  practical  enthusiasm, 
if  not  proficiency. 

Almost  the  only  indispensable  requisite  of  a 
golf  course  is  space.  If  a  sufficient  area  is  avail- 
able, the  impracticability  of  the  surface  for  other 
games  is  rather  a  recommendation  ;  all  such  irregu- 
larities and  impediments  are  known  as  "  bunkers." 
Without  these,  all  would  be  literally  flat,  stale,  and 
unprofitable  to  the  chronic  golfer,  who  estimates 
his  enjoyment  by  the  number  of  "  hazards "  such 
obstructions  oblige  him  to  play. 

The  full  course  may  be  any  distance  from  three 
to  five  miles,  though  a  course  half  the  size  may 
be  played  round  twice.  Eighteen  holes,  from  four 
and  a  half  to  five  inches  in  depth  and  diameter, 
are  cut  in  the  turf  at  intervals,  not  necessarily 
equidistant,  and  kept  in  shape  with  a  metal  lining. 

The  turf  around  each  hole  for  about  twenty 
yards  must  be  perfectly  level.  These  spaces  are 
known  as  "  putting  greens,"  and  are  tended  as  so 
many  gardens.  In  each  hole  is  placed  a  long  rod, 
surmounted  by  a  flag,  to  indicate  its  locality ;  but 
should  the  course   be  unusually  undulating,   addi- 


GOLF  :     THE    COMING    GAME. 


91 


tional  "  guide  flags "  are  placed  to  mark  the  route 
from  hole  to  hole.  These  flags  should  be  of  a 
uniform  color  for  half  the  circuit,  while  those  in- 
dicating the  return  route  should  be  a  distinct  con- 
trast. 

Adjoining  each  "putting  green,"  a  small  space 
within  painted  lines  is 
reserved  as  a  "  teeine 
ground."  It  is  from  this 
the  ball  is  "  teed"  to- 
ward the  next  hole.  To 
facilitate  the  game,  a 
box  of  sand  is  gener- 
ally placed  within  reach 
of  the  players  ;  and,  from 
this,  a  bit  of  sand  may 
be  taken  to  elevate  the 
ball  slightly,  and  insure 
a  clean  and  effective  hit. 

The  ball  used  is  of  solid  rubber,  about  five 
inches  in  circumference.  The  game  commences 
by  each  side  playing  a  ball  from  the  teeing 
ground,  where  the  start  and  finish  of  the  course 
converge  in  the  direction  of  the  first  hole.  A 
side  may  consist  of  one  or  more  players,  and  two 


Among  the  Bunkers. 


92  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

or  more  sides  constitute  a  game.  The  hole  is 
won  by  the  side  "holing  its  ball''  in  the  fewest 
strokes.  When  the  strokes  are  equal,  the  hole 
is  divided. 

As  the  hole  is  approached  by  the  leading  player, 
the  flagstaff  is  temporarily  removed  until  the  hole 
is  scored.  The  ball  is  then  struck  from  the  adja- 
cent "  teeing  ground "  in  the  direction  of  the  sec- 
ond hole,  and  so  on.  In  a  match  the  partners 
strike  alternately  from  the  tees,  and  also  during 
the  play  of  the  hole. 

The  players  who  are  to  strike  against  each 
other  should  be  named  at  starting,  and  continue 
in  the  same  order.  The  side  winning  a  hole  leads 
in  starting  for  the  next.  This  privilege  is  called 
the  "honor." 

One  round  of  the  links  (a  round  amounts  gen- 
erally to  eighteen  holes  in  all)  is  a  match,  unless 
otherwise  agreed  upon.  The  match  is  won  by 
the  side  which  gets  more  holes  ahead  than  re- 
main to  be  played,  or  by  the  side  winning  the 
last  hole  when  the  score  is  even  at  the  previous 
one. 

When  there  is  only  one  player  on  each  side,  the 
match  is  called  a  "  singles."     Two  players  on  a  side 


GOLF  :     THE   COMING    GAME.  93 

constitute  a  "  foursome."  These  are  the  two  most 
common  and  popular  forms  of  golf. 

What  lends  golf  the  variety  and  uncertainty 
which  are  its  chief  fascinations,  is  the  diversified 
surface  over  which  it  is  played.  All  obstructions, 
from  scrub  to  stone  walls,  intercept  the  ball  in  its 
progress  from  hole  to  hole.  As  it  cannot  be 
handled,  save  in  very  excep- 
tional cases,  it  must  be 
"  played  out "  of  the  "  bunker  " 
or  "  hazard"  which  stopped  its 
flight.  To  make  the  smallest 
number  of  strokes  to  release 
it,  clubs  in  great  va- 
riety are  used. 

A    moderate    golf 
equipment      is     sup-      "^" " ""  ^""^•''^ 

Teeing  with  the  Driver. 

posed  to  include  the 

driver,  long  spoon,  short  spoon,  brassy,  driving 
iron,  lofting  iron,  mashy,  cleek,  niblick,  and  putter. 
The  first  four  and  the  last  have  wooden  heads. 
The  remainder  are  of  iron.  The  driver  is  used 
for  "  teeing,"  and  easy,  long-distance  strokes.  The 
long  spoon  is  used  in  high  grass,  and  when  ele- 
vation of  the  ball  is  desired.     The  "driving"  and 


GOI.F  :     THE    COMING    GAME.  95 

"  lofting  "  irons  serve  as  more  powerful  alternates. 
The  short  spoon  is  used  for  short  drives,  and  when 
the  player  stands  below  the  level  of  the  ball.  The 
brassy,  niblick,  and  cleek  are  tried  in  very  awkward 
"  hazards."  The  "  mashy  "  and  "  putter  "  come  into 
play  when  on  or  near  the  "  putting  green." 


ABOUT   BICYCLES. 

BY    KIRK    MUNROE. 

Founder  of  the  League  of  American    IVheelnun. 

NEVER,  since  the  beginning  of  the  world,  have 
boys  and  girls  been  provided  with  so  many 
opportunities  for  having  good  times,  combined  with 
healthful  recreation,  as  in  these  days  of  what  is 
truly  called  "  the  age  of  sports."  Boating  and 
canoeing  on  the  water,  tennis  and  bicycling  on  land, 
are  as  freely  offered  to  girls  as  to  boys,  with  base- 
ball, la  crosse,  cricket,  and  foot-ball,  thrown  in  as 
extras  for  the  latter.  Of  all  these  sports  it  seems  to 
me  that  bicycling  should  rank  first,  not  only  for  the 
pleasure  that  it  gives,  and  the  excellent  exercise 
that  it  affords,  but  on  account  of  the  practical  good 
that  the  bicycle  is  accomplishing.  One  of  the  chief 
needs  of  this  great  country  is  good  roads.  The 
value  of  a  farm  is  doubled  the  moment  it  is  con- 
nected with  its  nearest  market  town  by  a  well  mac- 

96 


ABOUT    BICYCLES.  97 

adamized  road.  Not  only  this,  but  all  its  products 
can  be  sold  more  cheaply  to  the  dwellers  in  towns 
and  cities.  But  very  few  people  realized  how  bad 
our  American  roads  were  until  they  began  to  ride 
bicycles  over  them.  Then  they  found  out  quickly 
enough  ;  and  now  every  wheelman  in  the  country  is 
an  advocate  of  good  roads.  This  being  the  case,  I 
am  sure  that  when  the  great  and  ever-increasing 
army  of  boy  and  girl  riders  of  to-day  become  old 
enough  to  have  a  voice  in  public  affairs,  their  very 
first  demand  will  be  for  good  roads  for  their  bicycles 
throughout  the  length  and  breadth  of  the  land. 

There  are  many  complaints  made  that  bicycles 
are  ridden  on  sidewalks,  and  we  see  signs  every- 
where forbidding  this  practice  —  that  is,  everywhere 
in  the  neighborhood  of  bad  roads  ;  for  where  the 
roads  are  good  the  signs  are  not  necessar)'.  If  the 
roads  were  as  smooth  and  hard  as  the  sidewalks,  or 
even  smoother  and  harder,  as  they  should  be,  no 
bicycle  rider  would  ever  think  of  taking  to  the  side- 
walks, or  have  the  sliofhtest  desire  to  do  so.  With 
such  roads  as  the  Beacon  Street  extension  running 
out  of  Boston,  or  many  that  exist  in  Brookline  and 
the  Newtons,  or  around  Chestnut  Hill  Reservoir,  or 
in  Central  Park  and  the  New  York  boulevards,  or  in 


98  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS, 

the  Oranges  of  New  Jersey,  or  in  Fairmount  Park  of 
Philadelphia,  or  Druid  Hill  Park  of  Baltimore,  or 
the  streets  of  Washington,  or  the  Chicago  boule- 
vards, or  the  Cliff  Drive  in  San  Francisco,  no 
wheelman  has  any  inclination  to  ride  on  the  side- 
walks, nor  are  any  warning  signs  needed.  Where, 
on  the  other  hand,  he  comes  to  such  disgraceful, 
rocky,  sandy,  and  rutty  roads  as  exist  in  and  around 
most  of  the  smaller  cities  and  towns  of  the  country, 
he  must  either  give  up  riding  entirely,  or  else  take 
to  the  footpaths  and  sidewalks  ;  and  in  spite  of  the 
risk  of  arrest  and  fine  thus  incurred,  he  generally 
prefers  to  do  the  latter. 

In  this  connection  I  wish  to  suggest  to  all  young 
bicycle  riders  that  there  is  no  time  or  place  where 
politeness  pays  better  than  when  you  find  yourself 
compelled  by  the  state  of  the  roads  to  share  a  foot- 
path with  pedestrians.  They  have  as  good  a  right 
there  as  you  have  —  probably  a  better  one.  Do 
not,  then,  attempt  to  pass  them  without  warning  and 
at  full  speed,  or  shout  to  them  to  "  look  out  of  the 
way,"  or  demand  a  free  passage  by  the  ringing  of 
bells  or  the  blowing-  of  shrill  whistles.  All  of  these 
things  are  rude,  startling,  and  exceedingly  ill-bred. 
Moreover,  they  serve  to  make  enemies  where,  it  is 


ABOUT    BICYCLES.  99 

most  important  the  bicycle  should  have  friends. 
No  one  will  refuse  to  allow  you  room  to  pass  if  you 
slacken  speed,  and  politely  ask  him  to  do  so ;  and  a 
pleasant  "Thank  you"  in  acknowledgment  of  the 
courtesy  thus  rendered  will  go  far  toward  securing 
that  person's  favorable  consideration  of  the  rights 
of  bicycles,  and  the  need  of  good  roads  for  them, 
the  next  time  the  question  is  brought  to  his  atten- 
tion. 

Now,  boys,  for  a  word  with  you.  Will  you  tell 
me  why,  as  a  rule,  you  double  yourselves  up  like 
jackknives,  and  bend  over  so  as  to  almost  touch 
your  handle-bars  while  riding  ?  Is  it  because  you 
think  it  a  becoming  attitude  ?  Well,  it  isn't.  It 
makes  you  look  like  so  many  wooden  monkeys, 
climbing  sticks.  If  you  gain  any  speed  by  it  you  do 
so  at  the  expense  of  wind,  for  it  is  certain  that  you 
can't  breathe  so  well  in  that  position  as  when  sitting 
straight.  Besides,  do  you  find  it  necessary  or  even 
enjoyable  to  "  scorch  "  or  ride  at  full  speed  all  the 
time  ?  I  will  admit  that  in  riding  up  a  steep  hill,  or 
against  a  strong  wind,  there  is  something  to  be 
gained  by  bending  over,  though  it  is  not  necessary 
even  in  those  cases.  In  horseback  riding  only 
jockeys,  while  engaged  in  racing,  bend  low  over  the 


lOO  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

horse's  neck.  The  road  rider  who  assumes  such  a 
position  would  be  a  subject  for  derision.  Moreover, 
by  persistent  bending  over,  you  are  weakening  your 
lungs,  curving  your  spines,  and  rounding  your 
shoulders.  You  are  training  yourselves  to  become 
crooked-backed,  hollow-chested,  stoop-shouldered 
men.  If  this  is  what  the  bicycle  is  doing  for  you,  it 
would  be  better  that  you  had  never  seen  one.  So 
there,  boys,  drop  this  practice  of  bending  over  just 
as  quickly  as  you  know  how.  Sit  up  as  straight  as 
the  girls  do,  or,  better  still,  as  straight  as  a  cavalry 
soldier  on  parade  ;  throw  back  your  shoulders,  ex- 
pand your  lungs,  and  in  after  years  you  will  have 
good  cause  to  bless  the  day  that  gave  you  your  first 
bicycle. 

As  for  the  girl  bicycle  riders  who,  as  a  rule,  put 
the  boys  to  shame  by  riding  as  straight  as  though 
they  were  on  horseback,  I  am  afraid  that  in  some 
cases  they  only  do  so  because  they  can't  bend  over 
and  breathe  at  the  same  time.  How  is  it,  girls  ? 
Are  not  some  of  you  trying  to  ride  in  corsets,  or  at 
least  in  tight  waists  and  belts  ?  If  so,  you  are  pre- 
paring for  yourselves  a  future  of  even  greater  suf- 
fering and  unhappiness  than  the  monkey-like  boys 
who  bend  low  over  their  handle-bars  ;  and  to  you, 


A  Halt  by  the  Way. 
{By  permission  of  ike  Western  ll'lteel  Works,  Chicago,  III.) 


ABOUT    BICYCLES.  IO3 

too,  I  would  say  that  it  were  better  never  to  have 
seen  a  bicycle  than  to  attempt  to  ride  under  such 
conditions.  Can  you,  when  dressed  for  a  ride,  raise 
your  arms  straight  above  your  head  and  bring  the 
palms  of  your  hands  together  ?  Can  you  stoop  over 
and  touch  your  toes  with  the  tips  of  your  fingers 
without  bending  the  knees?  If  you  can,  your  rid- 
ing costume  is  all  right.  If  you  cannot,  it  is  all 
wrong. 

Before  dropping  the  subject  of  riding  costumes, 
I  want  to  suggest  that  bicycle  riding  is  a  most  ener- 
getic form  of  exercise,  and  that  one  becomes  quickly 
heated  by  it  even  on  a  cool  day  ;  therefore,  the  wear- 
ing of  underclothing  of  light  flannel,  which  readily 
absorbs  perspiration,  is  most  important.  In  these 
days  of  pneumonia  and  kindred  troubles,  it  is  also 
very  desirable  that  a  coat,  jacket,  or  sweater  should 
form  part  of  the  equipment  of  every  bicycle.  It 
should  be  compactly  folded,  and  strapped  to  the 
handle-bar  or  luggage-carrier  during  the  ride,  and 
put  on  by  the  rider  the  moment  a  halt  is  called.  It 
makes  little  difference  how  thinly  you  are  clad  while 
engaged  in  the  heating  exercise  of  riding,  so  long 
as  you  are  provided  with  a  warm  over-garment  to 
cool  off  in.     All  athletes  recognize   this   necessity. 


I04  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

Note,  for  instance,  the  heavy  woollen  sweaters  that 
are  drawn  over  the  heads  of  the  foot-ball  men  the 
moment  they  stop  play.  We  blanket  our  over- 
heated horses  in  order  to  save  them  from  the  effects 
of  a  too  sudden  cooling.  Shall  we  not  orive  to  our- 
selves  at  least  the  same  amount  of  care  that  we 
bestow  upon  them  ? 

So  much  for  the  rider.  Now  for  the  machine. 
The  bicycle  is  at  once  the  lightest,  strongest,  and 
most  easy-running  of  all  wheeled  vehicles.  With 
its  air-cushioned  rubber  tires,  steel  spokes,  ball 
bearings,  spring  seat,  and  hollow  steel  frame,  it  is 
perfectly  adapted  to  its  work.  At  the  same  time  all 
of  its  adjustments  are  so  delicate  and  so  dependent 
upon  each  other,  that  a  disturbance  of  any  one 
affects  the  whole  machine.  A  squeak  or  rattle 
should  not  be  tolerated  for  a  minute.  Every  prop- 
erly equipped  tool-bag  contains  the  means  for  re- 
moving either  of  these  nuisances.  Always  examine 
and  test  every  part  of  your  bicycle  before  starting 
on  a  ride,  and  never  fail  to  have  your  tool-bag  pro- 
vided with  wrench,  screw-driver,  a  full  oil-can,  a  bit 
of  soft  rag,  and  a  small  bottle  of  cement.  Above 
all,  make  a  point  of  knowing  your  machine,  its  every 
adjustment,  screw,  and  nut,  as  well  as  you   know 


ABOUT    BICYCLES.  IO5 

your  alphabet,  before   you   take   it   away  from   the 
place  at  which  you  have  purchased  it. 

Do  not  attempt  to  ride  either  far  or  fast  at  first. 
The  bicycle  brings  into  play  a  different  set  of 
muscles  from  any  that  you  have  exercised  before, 
and  you  must  give  them  time  to  become  accustomed 
to  their  work.  When  they  have  done  so,  and  you 
have  obtained  a  perfect  mastery  of  your  machine, 
you  will  be  able  to  take  daily  rides  of  from  ten  to 
fifty  miles  with  less  effort  than  you  formerly  ex- 
pended in  walking  a  third  of  those  distances.  To 
the  wheelman,  free  to  go  when  and  where  he  will, 
to  stop  where  and  for  as  long  as  he  pleases,  to  regu- 
late his  speed  at  will,  and  thus  to  have  absolute 
control  of  his  own  movements,  all  other  modes  of 
.conveyance  seem  tame  and  inadequate.  With  all 
this  the  bicycle  is  now  among  the  cheapest  of  lux- 
uries. Any  boy  or  girl  may  earn  one  by  obtaining 
a  few  new  subscribers  to  some  popular  or  enter- 
prising magazine;  while  those  whose  means  will 
permit  them  to  purchase  outright  will  find  by  con- 
sulting the  advertisements  that  prices  are  tumbling 
all  the  time.  Twenty  years  ago  I  paid  more  for 
an  old  wooden-wheeled,  iron-tired,  plain  bearing, 
and    springless   velocipede,    or    "  bone-shaker "   as 


io6 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


it  is  now  called,  than  would  purchase  a  first-class 
safety  bicycle  to-day.  Wherefore,  my  young  read- 
ers, be  thankful  that  your  youth  has  come  to  you 
in  an  age  of  bicycles,  rather  than  in  one  of  "  bone- 
shakers." 


RUNNING  AND    HURDLING. 

BY    NORMAN    W.    BINGHAM,    JR. 

CafilittH  Hamard  Track  Team  o/ iSt)^. 

'ARCELY  any  form  of  athletics 
has  so  many  followers  who  dif- 
fer so  absolutely  in  physique 
from  the  popularly  accepted 
idea  of  an  *'  athlete,"  as  do  the 
so-called  "  pedestrian  "  sports, 
which  include  running  and 
hurdling.  The  frailest  and  palest  youths  have 
sometimes  proved  themselves  the  most  powerful 
racers ;  and  it  is  no  uncommon  sight  on  the  track  to 
see  a  thin,  weak-looking  boy  run  a  big,  muscular 
fellow  "  off  his  feet."  The  possession  of  a  pair 
of  long  legs  is  no  assurance  that  their  owner  will 
be  able  to  get  over  the  ground  quickly,  nor,  as  has 
often  been  proved,  do  decidedly  short  ones  prevent 
his  doing  so.      The  fact  is,  there  is  absolutely  no 

107 


I08  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

means  of  judging  off-hand  what  sort  of  a  racer  one 
will  make.  For  this  reason,  the  boy  who  is  too 
small  to  play  foot-ball  or  to  row,  or  was  not  born 
with  the  base-ball  instinct  in  him,  may  turn  his 
attention  to  the  cinder-path,  with  the  consoling 
thought  that  from  just  such  as  he  many  a  cham- 
pion has  been  developed. 

There  is  no  better  athletic  sport  than  running ; 
none  which  should  bring  with  it  less  danger  of  phys- 
ical injury,  and  none  which  demands  so  small  an 
amount  of  time  daily  for  practice,  or  getting  into 
"  form."  Lasting  and  serious  harm,  however,  may 
result  from  improper  training. 

The  boy  who  desires  to  enter  for  a  foot-race 
should,  first  of  all,  be  sure  that  his  heart  is  strong ; 
he  should  assure  himself  that  he  has  no  special 
weakness  which  the  strain  of  competition  might 
aggravate. 

He  probably  knows  whether  his  abilities  lie  in 
the  direction  of  long  or  short  distances.  Only  ac- 
tual trials  and  racing  experience,  however,  can  de- 
termine for  just  what  distance  he  is  best  fitted. 
There  are  often  cases  in  which  boys  start  out  with 
the  idea  of  going  into  the  short  dashes,  and, 
after  attaining  little  success  at  that,  turn  out  first- 


RUNNING    AND    HURDLING.  I09 

class  middle-distance  or  distance  runners.  A  poor 
showing  in  a  first  race,  then,  should  not  discourage 
a  boy  from  further  effort. 

The  most  popular  distances  with  amateurs  in 
America  are  the  one  hundred  yards'  dash,  the  two 
hundred  and  twenty  yards'  dash,  quarter-mile,  half- 
mile,  and  mile  runs.  The  three-mile  and  five-mile 
runs  are  less  often  attempted,  and  the  still  longer 
distances  are  seldom  covered  except  in  "  cross- 
country" running. 

There  are  many  theories  as  to  the  best  method  of 
preparing  for  each  one  of  these  distances.  One 
trainer  may  tell  you  to  do  one  thing,  and  another 
will  say  that  is  just  wrong.  Moreover,  persons  of 
different  temperaments  and  dispositions  will  not 
always  do  well  under  the  same  treatment.  Experi- 
ence alone  will  prove  just  how  much  and  what  sort 
of  work  will  bring  a  man  into  the  best  possible  con- 
dition. Without  attempting  to  discuss  or  compare 
the  advantages  of  different  training  methods,  I  shall 
simply  attempt  to  throw  out  a  few  hints  to  boys 
who  have  no  chance  to  secure  a  trainer,  or  to  watch 
others  train. 

The  first  danger  to  be  avoided  is  that  of  trying  to 
do   too   much   at  once.     1    shall    always    remember 


no  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

one  evening  on  Holmes'  Field  in  Cambridge,  watch- 
ing a  number  of  "  town "  boys  training.  Some 
were  tearing  wildly  about  the  track  as  if  running  for 
a  record ;  others  had  thrown  themselves  on  the 
grass  exhausted. 

A  young  man  with  a  stop-watch  in  his  hand  called 
out  to  a  very  weary-looking  lad  who  had  thrown 
himself  face-downward  on  the  crrass  :  — 

"  Let's  see,  Jo,  what  you  training  for?" 

"  Quarter,"  was  the  reply. 

"  What  ye  done  to-night  ?  " 

"  J^§^&^^  two  miles." 

"  Feel  like  being  timed  a  quarter?" 

"  Well,  I  reckon  I'll  run  one  first,  'n'  see  how  m' 
wind  is." 

So  up  jumped  the  sprinter ;  he  ran  around  the 
track  at  a  smart  pace,  and  then  ran  his  quarter-mile 
on  time. 

Absurd  as  it  seemed,  it  was  but  the  exaggeration 
of  the  common  fault  of  all  beginners  —  a  tendency 
to  do  more  than  is  g-ood  for  them. 

If  the  beginner  intends  to  "sprint"  —  that  is, 
run  the  short  distances  up  to  a  quarter-mile  —  he 
had  better,  for  a  few  days,  take  slow  jogs  of  three 
hundred  or  four  hundred  yards. 


RUNNING    AND    HURDLING.  Ill 

Having  accustomed  his  muscles  to  the  exercise, 
he  may  vary  this  work  every  other  day  by  running 
at  fair  speed  for  about  two-thirds  of  the  distance  he 
intends  to  made  his  specialty.  If  it  be  the  hundred- 
yard  dash,  he  may  do  it  twice,  with  a  few  minutes' 
rest  between  each  dash.  The  slow  work  will  serve 
to  strengthen  the  muscles,  and  the  quick  work  to 
keep  them  limber.  Proceeding  in  this  manner,  the 
sprinter  should  be  able,  after 
ten  days  or  two  weeks,  to 
run  at  top  speed  without 
danger  of  straining  his  mus- 
cles. 

So    much    depends   on   a 
pfood    start    in    sprint    races 

°  '■  The  Standing  Start. 

that  much  of  a  man's  time 

must  be  devoted  to  getting  away  quickly  after  the 

starter's  pistol  is  fired. 

In  all  races  the  starter  gives  two  preliminary  com- 
mands to  the  men  before  sending  them  off.  At  the 
first —  "  On  your  marks  !  "  —  the  men  are  supposed 
to  take  their  positions  on  the  track ;  they  may.  if 
they  like,  scrape  out  small  holes  to  prevent  the  feet 
from  slipping  in  starting.  Then  the  word  comes, 
"  Set !  "  when  the  contestants  get  in  position,  ready 


112  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

for  the  signal  "  Go,"     As  every  false  start  entails 

the  penalty  of  being  set  back,  it  is  necessary  that 

this  position  should  be  a  steady  one. 

Speaking   generally,    there    are    two    prominent 

styles  of  starting,  each  of  which,  however,  has  its 

modifications. 

First,  there  is  the  standing  start,  which  is  used 

by  all  long-distance  runners  when  there  is  no 
need  of  starting  off  in  the  lead. 
The  runner  plants  one  foot  on 
the  "  scratch,"  or  starting-line, 
the  other  *  foot  is  placed  from 
twenty  inches  to  a  yard  back; 
then  throwing  the  weight  as 
^"^^  far  forward  as  is  possible  with- 

The  Low  or  "Crouching"  Start. 

out  losing  the  balance,  with 
one  arm  thrust  forward  and  the  other  back,  he  is 
"  set. 

Nearly  all  sprinters  nowadays,  however,  have 
adopted  some  form  of  the  low  or  "  crouching"  start. 
The  commonest  and  perhaps  the  easiest  way  to 
learn  is  that  in  which  both  feet  are  back  of 
"  scratch."  One  foot  is  planted  a  few  inches  be- 
hind the  line,  and  the  other  from  six  inches  to  a 
foot  still  farther  back.     When  told  to  set,  the  run- 


RUNNING   AND    HURDLING.  II 5 

ner  stoops,  places  his  hands  or  finger-tips  on  the 
mark,  and  throws  his  weight  forward  on  the  arms. 
When  the  hands  are  raised  from  the  ground  the 
tendency  is  to  pitch  forward,  and  he  must  either  run 
or  fall.  A  start  which  is  used  successfully  by  many 
sprinters  is  a  sort  of  combination  between  a  stand- 
ing and  crouching  position.  The  runner  takes  his 
position  as  if  for  a  standing  start,  with  his  feet 
spread  a  trifle  farther  apart.  At  the  word  "  set,"  he 
places  the  hand  corresponding  to  the  forward  foot 
on  the  line  just  inside  that  foot,  and  thus  divides 
his  weight  between  the  arm  and  leg.  This  affords 
him  the  advantage  of  being  steadier  than  in  the 
standing  start,  and  does  not  give  him  so  much  of  a 
strain  as  does  the  low  start.  Of  course,  on  the  days 
that  are  devoted  to  starting,  the  runner  can  make 
his  other  work  lighter.  It  is  well,  also,  while  start- 
ing, to  keep  on  occasionally  and  run  out  for  forty  or 
fifty  yards.  Otherwise  it  may  be  dififtcult  for  a  man 
to  get  into  his  regular  stride  after  he  starts. 

The  general  scheme  of  training  for  the  sprints 
may,  to  speak  very  roughly,  be  applied  to  the  other 
distances.  That  is  to  say,  there  must  be  some  long 
work,  and  more  shorter  fast  work.  As  I  have  said 
before,  however,  no  two  men  can  train  in  exactly 


Il6  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

the  same  manner.  Delicate  men  who  rely  largely 
on  their  "nerve"  to  carry  them  through  a  race, 
cannot  stand  as  much  severe  work  as  their  more 
rugged  fellows,  though  they  may  run  their  races 
quite  as  fast. 

Men  who  are  training  for  distances  from  the  quar- 
ter mile  up  scarcely  need  to  be  sent  beyond  their 
distance  oftener  than  once  or  twice  a  week.  The 
rest  of  the  time  may  be  spent  in  running  from  half 
to  two-thirds  the  distance  at  a  much  sharper  pace. 

As  to  a  man's  "style"  in  running,  there  is  not 
much  to  be  said,  except  that  he  should  be  as  natural 
as  possible.  He  should  stride  out  freely,  getting 
his  knees  well  up  in  front  of  him,  but  should  not 
attempt  to  step  too  far.  The  arms  should  swing 
easily  backward  and  forward,  and  should  not  be 
hugged  up  to  the  chest  in  such  a  way  as  to  contract 
the  lungs.  Above  all,  don't  attempt  to  run  with 
your  mouth  closed.  It  is  pitiful  to  see  some  men 
half  strangle  themselves  in  a  race  by  attempting  to 
breathe  throuorh  the  nose  alone. 

"Hurdling"  (or  leaping  over  obstructions  while 
running)  requires  not  only  the  speed  and  endurance 
of  flat-running,  but  also  a  coolness  and  grace  which 
some  men  can  never  acquire. 


RUNNING    AND    HURDLING.  II7 

There  is  a  material  difference  between  hurdling 
and  a  common  jump.  The  spring  being  taken  from 
one  foot,  the  other  should  be  brought  up  so  that  it 
will  be  nearly  as  high  as  the  knee,  and  only  slightly 
forward  of  it. 

The  leg  from  which  the  spring  is  taken  should  be 
allowed  to  follow  with  the  foot  well  back,  and  knee 
up  to  one  side.  Never  hurry  this  foot  forward.  In 
order  to  clear  the  hurdles  with  the  smallest  possible 
loss  of  time,  the  athlete  must  regulate  his  stride  so 
as  to  be  ready  to  leave  the  ground  at  practically 
the  same  distance  from  each  hurdle.  He  must  not 
go  higher  than  is  absolutely  necessary  to  clear  the 
hurdles,  and  must  land  on  the  ground  poised  in  a 
position  to  continue  his  running. 

The  two  popular  distances  with  hurdlers  are  one 
hundred  and  twenty  yards,  and  two  hundred  and 
twenty  yards.  In  the  former,  there  are  ten  hurdles, 
usually  three  feet  six  inches  in  height,  and  placed 
ten  yards  apart.  The  first  hurdle  is  fifteen  yards 
from  the  scratch.  In  this  race  the  runner  is  able  to 
get  in  just  three  strides  between  the  hurdles.  This 
forces  him  to  take  his  spring,  every  time,  from  the 
same  foot.  Fear  of  the  hurdles,  and  a  tendency  to 
get  too  near  them  before  leaving  the  ground,  are 


Il8  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

difficulties  against  which  the  beginner  has  to  con- 
tend. If  his  stride  comes  right,  however,  and  he 
is  able  to  run  fast  between  the  hurdles,  it  will  only 
require  practice  to  enable  him  to  run  through  with 
as  much  certainty  about  coming  up  to  the  hurdles 
properly  as  if  he  were  a  machine.  One  well-known 
high  hurdler  has  expressed  confidence  in  his  ability 
to  run  his  race  blindfolded. 

The  two  hundred  and  twenty  yard  hurdles  are 
each  two  feet  six  inches  high,  placed  twenty  yards 
apart,  the  first  one  being  set  twenty  yards  from  the 
start.  The  runner  will  find  it  necessary  to  take 
either  seven,  eight,  or  nine  strides  between  the 
hurdles.  The  best  hurdlers  require  only  seven. 
This  enables  the  runner  to  spring  or  "  take  off" 
always  with  the  same  foot.  Few  men,  however, 
have  a  long  enough  stride  or  sufficient  endurance 
to  enable  them  to  go  through  all  ten  hurdles,  taking 
only  seven  strides  between.  Eight  strides  demand 
of  the  runner  the  ability  to  "  take  off"  equally  well 
with  either  foot,  while  nine  strides  are  too  many  to 
enable  a  man  to  attain  any  great  speed  between 
hurdles.  The  ability  to  hurdle  easily  may  be  gained 
in  the  winter  by  using  a  single  hurdle  in  the 
gymnasium. 


I20  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

Whether  in  flat-running  or  hurdhng,  it  should 
always  be  remembered  that  a  race  is  won  at  the 
finish.  There  the  supreme  eflbrt  should  be  made. 
It  is  a  frequent  mistake  with  novices  to  stop  run- 
ning a  yard  or  two  from  the  finish,  and  many  a  race 
has  been  lost  in  this  way. 

Chapters  might  be  written  about  the  proper  way 
to  run  the  different  distances,  but  the  fine  points  of 
racing  are  best  learned  from  experience. 


HARE   AND    HOUNDS   RUNS. 

BY    DAVID    W.   FENTON,  2u. 
Harvard  and  ManhattaH  Cross-Couniry  Teams,  1892. 

LONG  before  cinder  tracks  and  spiked  shoes  were 
-^  known,  our  ancestors  settled  their  disputes  of 
superiority  in  regard  to  their  powers  of  speed  by 
running  across  the  meadows  and  plains.  It  is  an 
interesting  fact  to  note  the  decline  of  this  long- 
distance running  during  the  past  century,  and  its 
revival  again,  chiefly  through  the  medium  of  hare 
and  hounds  runs,  in  the  larger  American  univer- 
sities. 

Any  one  who  has  enjoyed  these  runs  on  brisk 
fall  afternoons,  and  experienced  their  invigorating 
effects,  will  never  avoid  an  opportunity  to  take  part 
in  this  popular  out-door  sport.  The  delicate  youth 
who  is  urged  into  it  by  the  enthusiasm  of  the 
old  runners,  increases  his  powers  of  endurance, 
gains  health  and  strength,  and  sees  Nature  in  all 
her  beauty. 

121 


122 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


The  general  code  of  rules  governing  hare  and 
hounds  runs,  often  called  "paper  chases,"  is  prac- 
tically the  same  in  all  the  larger  colleges.  Two 
of  the  runners,  termed  hares,  start  out  in  ordi- 
nary running  costume  with  canvas  bags  filled  with 
paper  cut  in   pieces  an  inch  square.      The   paper, 

or  "  scent,"  is  scattered  pro- 
fusely  along  the  course,  so 
that  it  may  be  easily  fol- 
lowed. Five  minutes  later, 
the  pack  of  hounds  break 
away,  headed  by  the  master 
of  hounds,  whose  duties  are 
to  set  the  pace  and  keep 
the  men  too^ether.  The  trail 
must  be  followed  at  all  times 
except  where  there  is  water, 
in  which  case  the  runners 
can  go  around  the  stream  or  ford  it,  as  they  choose. 
The  hares  run  much  faster  than  the  hounds,  as  the 
former  must  make  up  a  time  allowance  of  seven  min- 
utes ;  that  is,  the  hares  must  arrive  at  the  starting- 
point  twelve  minutes  before  the  arrival  of  the  first 
hound,  or  else  they  are  caught.  After  the  hares 
have  run  in  a  circuitous  route,  ranging  from  five  to 


A  Hare. 


■  Scattering  Scent. 


The  Hares-  —  Coming  to  the  Break. 


HARE  AND  HOUNDS  RUNS.  1 25 

ten  miles,  they  strew  a  profusion  of  paper  on  the 
ground  as  the  signal  for  the  "break."  When  the 
hounds  reach  this  point,  they  line  up,  wait  awhile 
for  the  stragglers,  and  then  break  away,  racing  for 
home.  The  first  and  second  hounds  in  at  the 
finish  receive  appropriate   prizes. 

The  hares  are  rarely  caught,  as  many  circum- 
stances cause  much  loss  of  time  by  the  hounds. 
Sometimes  the  wind  blows  away  part  of  the  scent, 
and  the  small  boys  along  the  route  often  pick  up 
the  bits  of  paper  and  lay  a  false  trail.  Thus 
much  time  may  be  lost  in  discovering  the  true 
course.  The  desire  for  prizes  has  sometimes 
caused  the  hares  to  lay  double  trails  and  resort 
to  other  unsportsmanlike  means  to  deceive  the 
hounds ;  but  this  fault  has  been  remedied  by  the 
passage  of  a  rule  which  provides  that  the  hares 
shall  receive  no  prizes. 

The  ideal  course  usually  lies  about  a  hilly  coun- 
try, through  patches  of  woods,  and  over  fences  with 
numerous  water-jumps  occurring  along  the  way. 
These  different  obstacles  lend  variety,  and  the 
distance  is  not  realized  half  as  much  as  when 
one  encircles  a  running  track  for  an  hour  or  so. 
Many  men   fail   to  compete   in   these  runs  on   the 


HARE  AND  HOUNDS  RUNS.  1 27 

supposition  that  they  are  short-winded,  and  have 
not  the  endurance  to  withstand  the  effects  of  a 
five-mile  chase.  This  is  no  criterion,  for  the  suc- 
cessful competition  of  sprinters  and  short-distance 
men  has  proved  that  all  classes  of  runners  can 
compete  with  ease  and  success.  The  pleasantest 
features  of  this  sport  are  the  social  intercourse, 
and  the  feeling  that  one  is  not  compelled  to  en- 
dure the  hardships  of  a  contest ;  for  the  race  from 
the  "  break  "  usually  narrows  down  to  the  six  fast- 
est men  in  the  pack. 

In  the  past,  college  hare  and  hounds  chases 
have  been  confined  to  the  fall ;  but  any  number 
of  fellows  thus  inclined  can  enjoy  this  sport  at 
any  season  of  the  year.  Those  who  are  accus- 
tomed to  the  routine  work  of  chest  weiofhts  and 
dumb-bells  should  take  part  in  this  out-door  exer- 
cise, by  going  out  for  a  five-mile  spin  twice  a 
week,  and,  on  the  return,  experience  the  reaction 
of  a  cold  shower-bath. 


HINTS   FOR   YOUNG   PEDESTRIANS. 

BY    CHARLES    M.    SKINNER. 

IF  I  could  inspire  ten  wide-awake  young  fellows 
with  a  fondness  for  pedestrian  exercise,  I 
should  be  quite  satisfied  to  jot  down  some  hints 
on  walking  tours,  suggested  out  of  an  experience 
of  many  excursions,  aggregating  several  thousand 
miles  of  walking. 

A  self-reliant  lad  of  good  constitution  should 
be  able  to  get  along  by  himself  for  a  week  or  two, 
and  to  find  his  way  through  almost  any  part  of  the 
United  States  without  other  assistance  than  civil 
speech  and  a  small  map  ;  and  if  he  is  not  a  self- 
reliant  lad,  I  know  of  few  things  that  will  do  more 
to  develop  his  pluck,  and  cultivate  a  habit  of  think- 
ing and  acting  for  himself,  than  walking.  Mind, 
I  do  not  mean  walking  about  a  sawdust  ring  with 
the  object  of  scoring  a  higher  number  of  miles  than 
some    other   contestant ;     for,  while    admitting    the 

128 


HINTS    FOR    YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  1 29 

value  of  non-professional  track-athletics  as  an  edu- 
cator of  nerve  and  muscle,  it  is  to  be  remembered 
that  nerves  and  muscles  are  kept  on  a  strain 
that  often  produces  bad  effects  when  the  walk  is 
over ;  then,  too,  in  plodding  over  dull  ground  or 
empty  floors  the  thoughts  are  tied  down  to  the 
work  and  the  surroundings,  instead  of  being  free 
to  roam,  as  when  the  walker  is  in  open  air  and 
in  the  midst  of  beautiful  scenery. 

In  the  first  place,  you  want  at  least  a  week  for 
your  trip.  If  you  have  more  time  to  give,  you  will 
be  in  better  trim  the  longer  you  walk,  as  you 
should  aim  to  increase  your  distance  a  little  every 
day.  Many  people  unaccustomed  to  long  walks 
are  exhausted  by  a  ten-mile  tramp  ;  but  by  begin- 
ning, say  with  seven  or  eight  miles,  and  increasing 
a  mile  or  so  daily,  walkers  become  able  to  pace  off 
forty  miles  a  day  and  to  be  none  the  worse  for  it. 
The  object  of  a  pedestrian  trip  is  not,  however,  to 
ascertain  how  much  or  how  fast  you  can  walk,  but 
to  see  the  country,  gain  new  experiences,  and  enjoy 
yourself.  Of  course,  in  order  to  do  this  you  must 
attain  a  reasonable  degree  of  speed  and  endurance, 
otherwise  you  will  find  walking  a  poky  affair.  To 
find  yourself  at  night  near  the  place  you  left  in  the 


130  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLEllCS. 

morning  is  discouraging,  for  you  will  begin  to  con- 
sider life  too  short  to  see  much  without  the  assist- 
ance of  horses  and  railroad  trains. 

Lay  out  your  route  before  you  start,  calculate 
your  expenses,  and  supply  yourself  with  money 
enough  to  meet  them,  as  well  as  to  provide  for  con- 
tingencies. Arrange  for  the  reception  of  letters 
at  various  points,  allowing  two  days  between  the 
time  of  writing  and  of  receiving,  for  distances  over 
one  hundred  and  under  five  hundred  miles  from 
home.  By  planning  your  trip  before  starting,  as 
you  may  with  the  aid  of  maps  and  guide-books, 
you  will  know  exactly  what  you  are  undertaking, 
and  will  avoid  mistakes  and  confusion.  Be  sure 
that  you  know  where  you  are  going,  and  that  you 
are  posted  as  to  the  points  of  interest  along  the 
line  of  march. 

Do  not  encumber  yourself  with  useless  luggage. 
If  you  carry  more  than  three  or  four  pounds  of 
"  traps,"  you  will  be  tempted  to  turn  about  and 
take  them  home  before  you  have  been  more  than 
two  hours  on  your  journey.  If  you  intend  to  camp 
out  every  night,  you  must  be  content  to  go  heavily 
weighted,  and  to  put  up  with  many  discomforts. 
You  will  sleep  cold,  you  will  get  wet,  you  will  be 


HINTS    FOR    YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  I3I 

obliged  to  carry  a  tent,  hatchet,  pan,  pot,  cup, 
knife,  fork,  spoon,  and  some  provisions ;  and  you 
will  be  inclined  to  doubt  if  the  fun  equals  the 
trouble,  unless  you  accompany  a  jolly  party,  and 
have  the  whole  summer  before  you.  Here  is  my 
whole  equipment  for  tours  of  any  length  ;  it  is  all 
I  took  on  a  trip  across  the  continent,  and  were  I 
to  visit  Europe  I  should  add  nothing  to  it :  — 

(i)  A  soft  leather  satchel,  about  ten  by  twelve 
inches,  slung  from  the  shoulder  by  a  strap.  It 
contains  (2)  a  gossamer  rubber  overcoat,  (3)  a 
nightgown,  (4)  a  collar,  (5)  a  neck-tie,  (6)  a  guide- 
book, or  map,  (7)  postal  cards,  (8)  comb,  (9) 
toothbrush,  (10)  "telescope"  cup;  and  room  is 
still  left  for  packing  small  minerals  or  photographs 
of  places  that  I  visit.  In  my  pockets  I  carry  (i  i)  a 
watch,  (12)  sketch-book,  (13)  pencils,  (14)  knife, 
(15)  diary,  (16)  toothpicks,  (17)  handkerchief, 
(18)  money,  (19)  and  a  book  for  reading  during 
bad  weather  and  at  inns  in  the  evening.  I  also 
carry  (20)  a  stout  cane,  which  gets  to  be  a  com- 
panionable sort  of  thing,  and  may  be  of  service  as 
a  weapon.  It  is  worth  carrying  for  the  sense  of 
protection  you  receive  from  it,  if  for  no  other  rea*- 
son.    The  rubber  overcoat  is  more  than  a  comfort  in 


132  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

showery  weather.  The  nightgown  should  be  indis- 
pensable to  everybody ;  for  it  is  unhealthful  and 
uncleanly  to  wear  the  same  clothing  day  and  night. 
Even  when  compelled  to  sleep  in  barns  —  and 
there  are  worse  beds  than  a  hay-mow  —  I  laid 
aside  at  night  every  vestige  of  clothing  worn  dur- 
ing the  day,  allowing  it  to  air  and  dry  thoroughly 
until  morning.  It  is  a  luxury  to  slip  out  of  your 
dusty  clothes,  damp  with  perspiration ;  it  is  pleasant 
to  find  them  fresh  and  serviceable  when  you  awake. 
Clear  water  is  the  best  adjunct  to  a  toothbrush  in 
the  care  of  the  teeth.  Soap  and  towels  you  find 
everywhere,  so  there  is  no  need  for  taking  them. 
By  all  means  carry  a  note-book,  or  diary,  and  make 
a  daily  jotting  of  your  distances  and  adventures. 
Though  you  write  but  five  or  six  lines  a  day,  those 
little  hints  will  serve  in  after  years  to  strengthen 
memories  of  what  will  probably  be  classed  among 
the  happiest  days  of  your  life.  So  with  the  sketch- 
book. The  roughest  and  hastiest  of  my  sketches, 
though  of  interest  to  nobody  but  myself,  calls 
up  a  hundred  circumstances,  and  puts  me  back 
among  the  hills  in  a  twinkling.  Be  earnest  in 
your  sketching,  and  let  your  drawing,  although  but 
an  outline,  be   as  true  as  you  can   make  it.      My 


HINTS    FOR   YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  1 33 

sketch-book    is    carried    in    a    large    pocket    inside 
my  coat. 

Now  as  to  clothes.  It  is  plain  that  you  should 
not  set  out  upon  a  two-hundred-mile  walk  dressed 
in  broadcloth,  kid  gloves,  and  patent  leathers. 
Take  your  every-day  suit,  see  that  all  the  pockets 
are  sound,  and  the  buttons  sewed  on  tightly.  Be 
sure  that  your  shoes  are  thick-soled,  well  oiled  and 
broken  in  ;  and,  if  you  are  going  to  climb  moun- 
tains, tell  the  cobbler  to  put  soft  iron  nails  into  the 
heels  instead  of  hard  iron  or  steel,  for  the  latter 
become  smooth  and  slippery,  making  your  footing 
unreliable  on  steep  ledges.  There  is  no  need  of 
suggesting  that  you  may  paddle  about  barefooted 
now  and  then.  You  will  be  sure  to  do  that  be- 
fore you  have  been  a  day  from  home ;  but  take 
smooth  roads  for  it.  Bathe  your  feet  every  night, 
and  if  they  are  a  little  tender  put  soap  on  your 
stockings.  You  will  see  from  my  inventory  that  I 
carry  no  stockings  except  those  that  I  wear.  It  is 
more  convenient  to  wear  out  the  pair  you  start 
with,  washing  them  now  and  then,  than  to  carry 
extra  ones.  When  they  are  no  longer  serviceable, 
throw  them  away  and  buy  new  ones.  You  may 
buy  them  at  country  stores  for  fifteen  cents.     Wear 


134  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

a  flannel  shirt  with  o-auze  underclothinor  next  to 
the  skin.  Let  the  sliirt  be  one  of  those  convenient 
arrangements  with  a  rolHng  collar  that  you  can 
turn  down  your  neck  on  state  occasions,  placing 
over  it  a  linen  or  paper  collar,  and  a  scarf.  As 
the  collar  and  tie  conceal  all  traces  of  the  shirt, 
nobody  knows  that  you  are  not  arrayed  in  the 
finest  linen.  How  do  I  get  my  shirt  washed?  In 
this  way :  my  nightgown  is  arranged  with  collar 
buttons,  and  I  conceal  the  front  with  the  collar 
and  scarf,  wearing  it  in  place  of  my  shirt  while  the 
laundress  is  scrubbing  the  dust  out  of  that  gar- 
ment. Flannel  shirts  need  washing  but  seldom 
where  underclothing  is  worn,  a  good  shaking 'often 
sufficing^  to  oret  the  dust  out  of  them.  The  nio-ht- 
gown,  collar,  handkerchief,  and  underclothing  should 
be  washed  and  ironed  for  you  within  eight  hours, 
if  you  make  the  laundress  understand  that  you  can 
wait  no  longer  for  them. 

You  will  find  it  so  difficult  to  organize  a  pedes- 
trian party,  that  you  may  as  well  make  up  your 
mind  at  the  outset  to  go  alone.  For  a  day  or  so 
you  may  feel  the  lack  of  company ;  but  it  will  take 
only  a  short  time  to  accustom  yourself  to  it,  and 
you  will  find  great  delight  in  the  absolute  liberty 


HINTS    FOR    YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  1 37 

you  will  enjoy.  I  have  never  succeeded  in  finding 
a  companion  for  a  longer  excursion  than  twenty- 
five  miles.  No  matter  what  plans  are  made  in 
advance,  at  the  last  moment  one  pedestrian  finds 
himself  up  to  his  ears  in  business,  another  has  a 
sore  toe,  and  another  has  paid  his  tailor's  bill  and 
hasn't  a  dollar  left.  I  have  long  given  up  hope 
of  walking  in  company  ;  but  one  is  seldom  lonely 
where  nature  is  beautiful,  and  there  is  always 
enough  to  think  about  without  talking.  Even  in 
seemingly  well-assorted  parties,  if  one  of  the  num- 
ber proves  to  be  lazy,  or  sulky,  or  dissents  from 
schemes  in  which  the  majority  concur,  or  cannot 
walk  fast,  or  wishes  to  linger  in  uninteresting 
places  for  selfish  reasons,  or  is  always  expressing 
dissatisfaction  with  the  route,  or  complains  loudly 
at  the  little  privations  of  travel  that  should  be  sub- 
jects of  merriment  instead  of  melancholy,  or  has 
some  hobby  that  he  indulges,  to  loss  of  interest  in 
his  walk,  or  is  vulgar  or  vicious  in  his  talk  or  habits, 
the  whole  trip  may  be  spoiled.  There  should  be  in 
a  party  the  cheerfulness,  delight  in  nature,  and  sin- 
gleness of  purpose,  that  you  would  feel  alone  ;  and 
it  is  difficult  to  find  this,  for  wherever  people  are 
assembled  together,  differences  of  opinion  arise. 


138  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

Supposing  you  have  started  upon  your  tramp. 
The  sun  shines,  flowers  and  foliage  sweeten  the 
air,  birds  sing  in  the  wood  yonder,  the  brook 
bubbles  its  cooling  music  beside  the  road,  the  dis- 
tant hills  are  clear  and  blue.  Very  likely  you 
have  seen  the  landscape  hundreds  of  times  before, 
but  it  has  a  new  charm  now;  for  you  are,  perhaps 
for  the  first  time  in  your  life,  absolutely  free. 
Steal  into  some  cornfield  by  the  wayside,  and  stand 
on  your  head  for  a  few  minutes  to  relieve  the 
immense  enthusiasm  that  this  feeling  is  certain  to 
awaken,  and  resume  your  walk.  You  have  eaten 
a  hearty  breakfast,  and  your  appetite  is,  no  doubt, 
healthy  enough  to  fill  your  landlords  with  some 
anxiety  when  you  begin  your  depredations  in  their 
dining-rooms ;  but  do  not  eat  a  big  dinner  at  noon. 
If  your  means  are  limited,  you  cannot  afford  it ;  if 
your  time  is  limited,  the  hour  you  will  spend  at  the 
table  will  be  a  heavy  sacrifice  ;  and  if  your  stomach 
is  heavily  loaded,  you  cannot  walk  as  blithely  as 
you  did  before  dinner.  Take  your  heartiest  meal 
later  in  the  day.  At  noon,  or  thereabout,  knock  at 
some  farmhouse  door  ;  and  ask  for  bread  and  milk. 
You  will  receive  enough  for  three,  your  bill  may 
reach  fifteen  cents^  but  it  is  more  likely  to  be  ten, 


HINTS    FOR    YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  1 39 

and  you  will  be  in  better  trim  to  continue  the  walk 
than  if  you  had  been  eating  meat,  vegetables,  and 
pie.  I  have  often  obtained  lunches  at  farmhouses 
that  were  almost  equal  in  variety  and  abundance 
to  a  regular  dinner.  Here  is  what  a  man  in  the 
Catskills  once  set  before  me,  after  apologizing 
for  the  emptiness  of  his  pantry :  cold  meat,  pre- 
served fruit,  cake,  bread,  pot-cheese,  and  fresh 
cider.  Now  guess  the  amount  of  his  bill.  Thir- 
teen cents !  Don't  be  bashful  about  asking  for  a 
bowl  of  bread  and  milk,  at  least  in  any  farmhouse 
of  respectable  size  and  appearance.  It  is  the  one 
thing  sure  to  be  found:  it  is  nourishing;  and  though 
the  charge  for  it,  if  one  is  made,  is  so  low  that  you 
feel  compunctions  of  conscience  for  not  paying  it 
twice,  remember  that  money  goes  farther  than  in 
town,  while  the  lunch  costs  your  worthy  host  the 
merest  trifle.  For  dessert,  help  yourself  to  fruit 
and  berries  from  the  wayside.  If  benighted,  storm- 
bound, or  astray,  you  will  have  little  difficulty  in 
getting  the  good  farmer  folk  to  give  you  a  lodging 
over  night,  offering  to  pay  them,  of  course,  for 
their  trouble.  They  will  perplex  you  with  their 
curiosity ;  but  if  you  talk  cheerfully  and  frankly, 
they  will  like  you,  and  your  stay  will  be  pleasant. 


T40  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

Unless  you  are  well  supplied  with  money,  do  not 
stop  over  night  in  cities  and  large  towns  upon  your 
route.  Arrange  your  trip  so  that  you  can  pass 
through  them,  and  put  up  at  the  tavern  in  a  village 
beyond.  Not  in  the  suburbs,  for  there  the  hotels 
are  wretched,  but  in  some  country  settlement ; 
there  the  beds  will  be  clean,  the  tables  well-sup- 
plied, the  charges  will  be  moderate,  and  you  will 
not  be  compelled  to  "  dress  up "  to  an  alarming 
extent  on  account  of  the  company  you  will  meet. 
Always  ascertain  the  amount  of  your  bill  in  advance. 
If  you  are  compelled  to  stop  in  a  city,  it  will  be 
wiser,  unless  your  stay  is  of  several  days,  to  engage 
rooms  and  pay  for  only  such  meals  as  you  have, 
than  to  lodge  in  a  pretentious  hotel  where  you  pay 
full  day's  board  if  you  are  there  only  two  hours. 
Should  you  lose  your  way,  or  find  yourself  belated 
and  compelled  to  spend  the  night  in  the  open  air, 
contrive  some  sort  of  covering  that  shall  keep  off  the 
dew,  A  tree  is  better  than  nothingf.  Do  not  licrht  a 
fire  unless  the  night  is  cold,  for  it  will  attract  bugs, 
moths,  and  flies  by  hundreds  ;  but  if  you  do  light 
one,  sleep  with  your  feet  towards  it,  and  make  sure 
that  nothing  in  the  vicinity  is  likely  to  catch  the 
flame.     I  doubt  if  your  first  night  on  the  ground  be 


HINTS    FOR    YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  I4I 

passed  in  very  sound  sleep.  You  will  better  enjoy 
thinking  and  telling  about  your  experience  after- 
ward, than  undergoing  it  at  the  time.  Mysterious 
murmurs  will  be  heard  in  the  branches ;  soft  foot- 
falls and  gliding  noises  will  come  from  thickets ; 
night  birds,  crickets,  katydids,  and  frogs  will  talk 
persistently ;  now  and  then  you  will  start  up  pre- 
pared to  affirm  that  you  heard  a  whisper ;  you  will 
wonder  if  there  are  snakes,  skunks,  weasels,  and 
rats  in  the  vicinity ;  and  it  may  be  some  hours 
before  you  realize  that  the  queer  noises  are  only 
produced  by  wind  and  harmless  insects;  then  your 
tired  head  will  sink  upon  the  grass,  you  will  thrash 
about  and  partly  wake  at  intervals,  and  will  pres- 
ently sit  up  to  rub  your  stiff  elbows  and  discover 
that  it  is  morning.  Before  lying  down,  remove  all 
hard  things  except  watch  and  money  from  your 
pockets,  as  they  will  press  into  your  flesh  when  you 
lie  upon  them,  and  hurt  you.  Then  turn  up  your 
coat  collar  and  button  your  clothing  well  about  you, 
for  dew  will  fall  and  the  night  be  chilly.  If  your 
hat  or  cap  is  too  good  to  sleep  in,  tie  your  hand- 
kerchief about  your  head.  Ease  your  feet  by  partly 
unlacing  or  unbuttoning  your  shoes,  and  be  sure 
that  your   shirt  is  not  tight  about  the  neck.     Use 


142  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

your  satchel  or  nightgown  as  a  pillow,  your  rubber 
overcoat  as  a  blanket,  a  heap  of  grass  or  leaves 
as  a  mattress.  You  will  rest  more  comfortably  if 
you  will  make  a  hollow  in  the  ground  about  three 
inches  deep,  for  your  shoulder  to  slip  into,  and 
another  like  it  for-  the  hip.  I  don't  recommend 
sleeping  out  of  doors  "  for  fun."  I  have  tried 
hoard  floors,  wagons,  and  freight  cars,  and  have 
found  them,  with  a  little  dressingr  of  weeds  and 
grass,  pleasanter  beds  than  bare  ground. 

As  to  a  "  stamping-ground,"  all  parts  of  the 
country  offer  attractive  pedestrian  routes,  though 
1  should  fancy  that  the  plains  and  prairies  might 
become  monotonous  to  the  walker.  Among  re- 
gions favorable  for  walking,  I  can,  from  experience, 
recommend  the  White  and  Green  Mountains,  Cat- 
skills,  the  Lehigh  region,  Hudson,  Connecticut, 
Housatonic,  Delaware,  Potomac,  and  Shenandoah 
valleys,  the  New  England  coast  from  Cape  Cod  to 
Portland,  Western  New  York  and  Niagara,  and  the 
regions  about  Montreal  and  Quebec.  These  dis- 
tricts are  penetrated  by  railroads  and  the  telegraph, 
so  that  in  case  of  accident,  sickness,  or  loss  of 
funds,  you  could  return  or  communicate  with  home 
at  once. 


HINTS    FOR   YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  1 43 

The  walker  may  pleasantly  vary  his  route  by  re- 
turning over  different  roads  from  those  upon  which 
he  set  forth.  Here  is  a  sample  route,  taken  from 
one  of  my  summer  tramps  :  Boston  to  Alton  Bay, 
N.  H.,  across  Lake  Winnepesaukee  by  steamer,  Cen- 
tre Harbor,  Campton.  Pemigewasset  valley,  the  Pool, 
Basin,  Flume,  PVanconia  Notch,  Profile,  Echo  Lake, 
Franconia,  Bethlehem,  Fabyan's,  Mt.  Deception, 
Mt.  Washington,  Crawford  bridle  path  over  the 
Presidential  range  to  the  Crawford  House,  White 
Mountain  Notch,  Bartlett,  Glen  Road  and  return. 
Iron  Mountain,  North  Conway,  Lake  Ossipee, 
Portland,  Salem,  Lynn,  and  Boston.  It  is  some- 
times practicable  to  establish  one's  headquarters  in 
the  centre  of  an  interesting  region,  striking  out 
in  various  directions  from  that  point.  Thus,  in  the 
Catskills,  the  village  of  Hunter  affords  a  convenient 
point  of  departure  for  Hunter  Mountain,  Stony 
Clove,  Kaaterskill  Clove,  Plattekill  Clove,  South 
and  North  Mountains,  Cairo,  Windham,  Lexington, 
and  Grand  Gorge. 

The  young  traveller  who  has  the  entire  summer 
before  him,  and  a  purse  long  enough  to  attempt 
such  an  undertaking  safely,  may  adapt  the  following 
route  to  his  liking  by  cutting  from  or  adding  to  the 


144  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

list  of  interesting  points,  going  over  some  portions 
of  the  country  by  rail,  and  perhaps  accepting  the 
numerous  invitations  to  ride  that  farmers,  travelling 
from  town  to  town,  extend  to  people  they  overtake 
upon  the  road.  Starting  up  the  Hudson  River 
from  New  York  visit  Sunnyside,  the  home  of  Irving; 
Tarrytown  and  its  quaint  Dutch  church  ;  Sing  Sing 
and  the  State  prison  there  ;  the  military  school  and 
old  forts  at  West  Point  ;  Storm  King,  highest  of 
the  Hudson  hills ;  Newburg  and  Washington's 
headquarters  ;  Saugerties,  from  which  point  a  de- 
tour can  be  made,  embracing  some  of  the  finest 
portions  of  the  Catskills,  returning  to  the  Hudson 
River  at  Catskill  village ;  Albany  and  the  Capitol ; 
Troy ;  Saratoga  and  its  famous  springs ;  Glen's 
Falls  ;  Fort  William  Henry ;  down  Lake  George 
by  steamer ;  Ticonderoga  and  its  historic  ruins ; 
down  Lake  Champlain  by  steamer,  stopping  at 
Port  Henry  or  Essex  for  a  brief  run  into  the  Adi- 
rondack region  ;  Port  Kent  and  Au  Sable  Chasm  ; 
Burlington  ;  up  the  Winooski,  ascending  Camel's 
Hump  and  stopping  at  Montpelier  ;  Wells  River  ; 
Woodstock,  N.  H.,  from  which  point  make  a  tour 
of  the  White  Mountains,  similar  to  that  just  out- 
lined ;  Boston,  or  Connecticut  valley,  to  New  York. 


HINTS    FOR   YOUNG    PEDESTRIANS.  1 45 

There !  Some  of  the  grandest  and  most  beautiful 
scenery  in  the  world  is  yours  to  enjoy  upon  this 
trip.  Or,  if  that  programme  is  not  sufficiently  am- 
bitious, you  may  omit  the  walk  across  Vermont,  and 
extend  your  trip  from  Port  Kent  to  Montreal  and 
Quebec,  descending  into  the  White  Mountain  re- 
gion of  the  North. 

The  interest  of  your  walk  will  be  much  increased 
if  you  will  glance  through  the  history  of  the  region 
you  intend  to  explore  ;  or,  if  you  have  a  scientific 
turn,  you  might  post  yourself  on  the  geology,  min- 
eralogy, or  botany  of  the  country. 


OUT-OF-DOOR   GYMNASTICS. 

BY   JOHN    GRAHAM, 

Athletic  Manager  Boston  Athletic  Association  and  Ex-Super iutendent  Otarlesbank 
Gyninasiiiiii. 

TO  the  healthy  boy  or  girl,  exercise  is  always 
attractive.  It  is  also  helpful  and  strength- 
ening'. The  practice  of  gymnastics  develops  the 
muscles,  tones  the  system,  and  yields  toughened 
sinews  in  place  of  debilitating  fat.  The  gymna- 
sium is  the  means  to  this  end  ;  its  simple  or  com- 
plicated appliances  alike  affording  that  opportunity 
for  systematic  development  that  modern  gymnas- 
tics aims  to  secure. 

But  fresh  air  is  the  chief  tonic.  An  out-of-door 
gymnasium,  where  such  is  possible,  is  then  an 
even  better  means  toward  the  acquiring  of  muscle 
and  sinew,  strength  and  health,  than  one  in-doors. 

Realizing  this  fact,  the  "powers  that  be"  in 
the  city  of  Boston  instituted  in  the  strip  of  park 
known    as    the    Charlesbank,   an    open-air    gymna- 

146 


OUT-OF-DOOR    GYMNASTICS.  1 47 

sium,  fitting  it  up  with  the  appHances  that  give 
the  best  exercise  —  chest  weights,  pulleys,  parallel 
bars,  horizontal  bars,  climbing  poles,  vaulting  poles, 
giant  strides,  jumping  boxes,  jumping  standards 
and  ropes,  sand  bags,  quoits,  dumb-bells,  hurdles, 
swings,  perpendicular  and  inclined  ladders,  rope 
and  Jacob's  ladders,  flying  rings,  inclined  and  per- 
pendicular poles,  trapezes,  breast  bars,  balance 
swings,  etc. 

This  out-of-door  "  gym "  is  almost  in  the  heart 
of  the  city.  It  occupies  a  space  in  the  fine  em- 
bankment alonor  the  Charles  River  near  to  the 
bridge  that  Longfellow  made  famous.  It  is  free 
to  the  public  ;  and  a  systematic  attempt  for  prac- 
tical instruction  has  been  attempted  with  excel- 
lent results. 

A  class  of  boys  was  formed  for  the  purpose  of 
experimenting  in  these  class  drills  under  no  roof 
but  the  sky.  Having  a  large  space  that  was  not 
being  occupied  for  anything  in  particular,  a  plat- 
form was  built  upon  the  ground,  made  from  the 
plank  walks  used  on  the  park  during  the  winter. 
This  platform  was  marked  off  in  spaces,  and  was 
found  to  accommodate  about  forty  in  a  class. 
None    of    the   bo)s   was   over   eighteen    years    of 


148  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

age ;  the  youngest  was  fifteen  years.  All  wore 
a  costume  consisting  of  a  white  shirt,  amateur 
running  pants,  and  rubber-soled  shoes. 

Every  one  of  these  boys  worked  all  day  at  some 
light  trade  ;  so,  to  make  it  convenient,  the  class 
was  called  together  at  half-past  six  every  alternate 
evening. 

Drills  lasted  fifteen  minutes,  each  drill  being 
followed  by  class  work  in  light  athletic  exercises. 
The  drills  were  changed  every  night,  so  that  the  boys 
did  not  receive  the  same  platform  drill  once  in  two 
weeks.  Drills  consisted  of  free  movements,  Indian 
clubs,  dumb-bells,  bar  bells,  sometimes  followed  by 
parallel  bars,  flying  rings,  and  athletics  in  the  pri- 
mary exercises.  As  an  experiment  I  feel  sure  it 
was  a  success.  At  the  beginning  it  was  impossible 
to  have  the  boys  go  through  these  exercises  without 
feeling  conscious  of  the  crowd  of  lookers-on  outside, 
who  amused  themselves  by  making  personal  re- 
marks on  the  different  attitudes  of  the  members  of 
the  class.  This  did  not  add  to  the  esprit  of  the 
class,  and  at  last  the  outside  critics  were  requested 
to  cease  their  remarks.  They  readily  complied,  and 
after  a  few  days  really  took  as  much  interest  in  the 
exercises  as  did  the   scholars  themselves.     Now,  it 


OUT-OF-DOOR    GYMNASTICS. 


149 


must  be  understood  that  these  boys  had  never  at- 
tended a  gymnasium,  so  that  it  was  much  harder  for 
them  to  face  a  large  crowd  than  it  would  be  for  boys 
who  had  been  accustomed  to  doing  their  "gym" 
work  in   public. 

After  the  novelty  had 
worn  off,  it  was  found  that 
the  exercises  could  be 
made  as  attractive  as  are 
in-door  gymnastics,  and 
much  more  beneficial  be- 
cause of  the  purer  air  and 
the  pleasant  surroundings. 

It  is  in  the  open  air  that 
one  attains  the  very  founda- 
tion for  physical  strength  ; 
and  if  this  out-of-door  ex- 
ercise is  but  carried  on  sys- 
tematically, it  will  prove  of 
the  utmost  importance  to  growing  bodies. 

The  field  for  out-door  gymnastics  is  wide  ;  people 
are  beginning  to  see  the  value  of  parks  and  breath- 
ing places  ;  and  gymnasiums  in  these  parks  are  of 
the  greatest  value,  both  physically  and  morally. 
The  exercises  that  are  carried  on  in-doors  can  be  re- 


The  Medicine  Ball.     (On  Top  of  Head.) 


I50 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


peated   out-doors  when    the   same   apparatus   is    at 
hand. 

The  German  Government,  through  its  school 
board,  makes  gymnastic  work  almost  compulsory, 
and   has   it  carried   on   out-of-doors.     There   are  a 

number  of  out-of-door 
gymnasiums,  and  these 
are  attended  by  all  the 
school  children.  Each 
gymnasium  is  provided 
with  a  director-general  of 
gy^mnastics.  The  gym- 
nasiums are  built  about 
the  same  as  the  Charles- 
bank  Gymnasium. 

At  the  Charlesbank 
the  giant  stride  is  a  pop- 
ular piece  of  apparatus. 
This  consists  of  a  stout  pole  fixed  in  the  ground, 
with  a  revolving  plate  on  its  head ;  hung  from 
the  plate  are  ropes,  with  handles  attached  to  them ; 
there  are  four,  six,  or  eight  ropes,  and  these  are 
grasped  separately,  while  each  performer  pushes 
on  the  ground  with  his  feet  until  all  attain  suf- 
ficient momentum  to  swing  around  without  touch- 


The  Medicine  Ball.     (On  One  Arm.) 


OUT-OF-DOOR    GYMNASTICS.  I5I 

ing  the  ground.  For  the  children,  instead  of 
ropes,  ribbons  are  used.  As  the  children  march 
around  the  pole  the  ribbons  are  plaited  around  it, 
making  a  very  pretty  sight  when  the  ribbons  are  of 
different  colors.  By  reversing  the  order  of  march- 
ing, the  ribbons  unwind  from  the  pole.  The  heavier 
apparatus  is  very  valuable  as  a  strengthener  of  the 
grasp,  and  assists  in  the  development  of  the  chest 
and  abdominal  muscles. 

All  the  special  apparatus  can  be  used  out-doors. 
Of  this,  special  mention  may  be  made  of  the  Neck 
Developer.  It  is  a  plain  band  of  canvas  with  a 
cross  piece  over  the  ears,  the  whole  being  brought 
to  a  point  in  front  of  the  forehead.  Fastened  to  the 
canvas  is  a  slip-hook,  which  can  be  attached  to  the 
handle  of  a  chest  weight.  By  standing  and  facing 
sideways  (left  and  right),  and  back  to  the  weight. 
the  muscles  of  the  neck  can  be  exercised. 

Another  piece  of  apparatus  is  the  Medicine  Ball, 
the  invention  of  Mr.  Roberts,  of  the  Boston  Y.  M. 
C.  A.  Gymnasium.  This  is  a  large,  leather-covered 
ball  weighing  about  ten  pounds.  The  mode  of  ex- 
ercising is  to  pass  it  from  one  to  the  other  from 
different  positions,  with  both  hands,  each  hand  sepa- 
rate—  from  over  the  head,  between  the  legs,  from 


152  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

the  riorht  and  left  side,  and  numerous  other  ways. 
When  used  as  it  should  be,  it  is  one  of  the  best  ex- 
ercises known,  both  as  a  strengthener  of  the  whole 
muscular  system  and  a  means  of  recreation. 

Another  popular  exercise  is  the  Spring  Board. 
This  apparatus  is  customarily  used  in  connection 
with  the  Jumping  Rope,  or  Buck.  In  the  former  the 
gymnasts  run  to  the  Spring  Board,  and  leap  over 
the  rope  at  different  heights.  When  this  is  done  in 
connection  with  the  Buck,  in  much  the  same  manner 
as  leap-frog,  finishing  with  a  roll  over  on  the  mat, 
the  exercise  it  affords  the  legs  is  most  admirable. 

Another  piece  of  apparatus  not  found  in  the 
in-door  gymnasium  is  the  Tilting  Ladder.  This 
appliance  is  a  source  of  great  enjoyment  to  those 
who  use  it,  and  is  a  very  popular  piece  of  apparatus. 
It  is  arranged  so  that  it  can  be  used  as  well  by  the 
small  boys  as  by  the  men,  for  the  pin  through  the 
centre  can  be  drawn  out  and  placed  lower  down  on 
the  posts  supporting  it.  The  sensation  of  flying 
through  the  air  induces  many  to  try  it,  for  it  is  a 
fact  that  an  apparatus  that  has  any  swing  in  connec- 
tion with  it  is  the  most  popular.  The  Tilting  Ladder 
acts  in  a  like  manner  with  the  Giant  Stride,  as  far 
as  developing  the  muscles  is  concerned. 


154 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


The  Jacob's  Ladder,  or,  as  the  boys  have  termed 
it,  the  "  Razzle  Dazzle,"  is  another  piece  of  appara- 
tus not  frequently  seen  in  a  gymnasium.  This 
ladder    is   hung    from    the   framework   by  a  swivel 

hook,  and  is  not  fas- 
tened in  the  ground, 
but  is  allowed  to  swing- 
loose.  The  rungs  of 
the  ladder  are  about 
eighteen  inches  apart, 
and  fastened  together 
by  a  chain  or  steel  bar, 
through  the  centre  of 
the  rung.  This  ar- 
rangement allows  the 
rungs  to  swing  loose. 
The  mode  of  exercis- 
ing with  this  apparatus 
is  to  grasp  a  rung  at 
the  full  reach,  and  lift 
the  body  from  the  ground  to  a  rung  opposite  the 
waist  line ;  then  the  legs  are  spread  apart,  and 
come  to  a  sitting  position  on  the  rung.  The  hands 
grasp  another  rung,  higher  up  the  ladder,  the  legs 
are  spread  apart,  and  so  one  pulls  himself  to  the 


The  "Razzle  Dazzle.' 


OUT-OF-DOOR    GYMNASTICS.  1 55 

top  of  the  ladder.  This  is  splendid  exercise  for  the 
muscles  of  the  hips  and  thighs,  while  the  back  and 
arms  also  come  in  for  a  great  deal  of  exercise. 

The  interest  in  out-door  work  is  growing  every 
year,  as  the  attendance  at  the  Charlesbank  shows. 
When  the  gymnasium  was  first  opened,  it  was 
looked  upon  as  a  place  for  fun  ;  now  it  is  esteemed 
as  a  place  where  the  needs  of  the  muscular  sys- 
tem are  attended  to  systematically. 

The  success  of  this  Boston  out-of-door  gymna- 
*  sium  should  lead  to  the  adoption  of  the  system  in 
other  cities  ;  while  the  fact  that  such  appliances  for 
open-air  exercise  are  possible  should  suggest  to 
inventive  and  wide-awake  boys  a  means  of  furnish- 
ing fun  and  exercise,  with  a  wide  scope  for  their 
ingenuity  and  skill. 


HOW  TO   MAKE   AN   OUT-DOOR 
GYMNASIUM. 

BY    WILLIAM    y.    GARCELON. 

GIVE  a  Yankee  boy  a  suggestion,  and  his  native 
ingenuity  will  devise  a  way  to  surmount  any 
difficulties  that  may  arise  during  his  attempt  to  fol- 
low and  develop  it.  Every  boy  delights  in  exercise  ; 
but  the  solid  ground  and  his  own  body  do  not  offer 
chance  for  enough  diversity  of  action  to  satisfy  his 
restlessness,  and  consequently  we  find  him  climbing 
fences  and  "  shinning  "  trees  at  every  opportunity. 
There  is  something  fascinating  about  a  gymnasium 
to  the  young  lad  and  older  youth,  but  unfortunately 
gymnastic  facilities  are  not  available  to  a  great  part 
of  energetic  Young  America.  Few  boys,  however, 
in  the  country  realize  how  easily  home-made  appa- 
ratus can  be  constructed.  A  few  suggestions  as  to 
the  building  and  equipment  of  a  rough-and-ready 
out-of-door  gymnasium  such  as  any  boy  can  make 

is6 


HOW    TO    MAKE   AN    OUT-DOOR    GYMNASIUM.       1 57 

for  himself,  may  be  adapted  by  the  reader  to  the 
circumstances  and  faciHties  at  hand. 

Every  boy  knows  what  is  required  for  the  con- 
struction of  the  ordinary  swing.  If  trees  are  near 
by,  they  may  be  made  very  useful,  as  they  are  often 
so  formed  that  they  will  furnish  support  for  a  beam 
or  joist  to  which  the  ropes  may  be  attached. 

Often  a  single  large  branch  will  support  the 
pendent  apparatus. 

Or,  if  in-doors,  there  is  always  some  convenient 
beam  in  barn  or  shed  which  can  be  utilized. 

If  made  rightly,  the  swing  may  serve  both  as  a 
swing  and  as  a  trapeze.  The  trapeze  bar  should 
be  from  an  inch  to  an  inch  and  a  half  in  diameter. 
The  handle  of  a  broken  pitchfork,  hoe,  or  rake  is 
often  used. 

Notch  the  bar  near  the  ends  to  prevent  the  rope 
from  slipping ;  hang  the  bar  so  that  it  can  just  be 
reached  from  the  ground,  and  the  trapeze  is  ready 
for  use.  Ropes  reaching  almost  to  the  ground 
may  be  fastened  to  the  bar,  and  there  you  have  a 
complete  swing  and  trapeze  combined.  When  the 
trapeze  is  used,  the  lower  swing  may  be  laid  aside. 

A  still  better  arrangement  is  to  have  the  trapeze 
bar  a  foot  or  six  inches  above  reach.     Attach  iron 


158  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS 

rings  to  ropes,  and  hang  them  from  the  trapeze  bar 
so  that  they  will  be  about  as  high  as  the  head. 
Numberless  little  combination  tricks  can  be  per- 
formed with  this  double  apparatus.  Rings  can  be 
purchased  at  one  dollar  a  pair. 

If,  however,  the  rings 'are  not  readily  procured  a 
handy  boy  can  make  them  himself  of  plaited  rope ; 
while  not  having  the  stiffness  of  the  iron  rings, 
these  will  serve  the  purpose. 

Of  course,  the  rings  may  be  detached  from  the 
trapeze  at  any  time.  Thus  we  may  have  with  little 
or  no  expense,  trapeze,  swinging  rings,  and  an 
ordinary  swing. 

These  equipments  require,  of  course,  some  over- 
hanging support. 

What  boy  has  not  circled  the  cross-bar  of  some 
old  barn  door?  Yet,  this  is  simply  the  horizontal 
bar ;  and  the  horizontal  bar  is  one  of  the  most  pop- 
ular pieces  of  apparatus  in  a  gymnasium.  The  best 
bars  are  made  of  hickory,  and  are  one  and  a  half  or 
two  inches  in  diameter.  The  ends  are  square  and 
when  regular  uprights  are  used,  there  are  small 
holes  at  the  ends  for  the  insertion  of  the  supporting 
pins. 

A  very  good    bar  can  be   purchased    of  dealers 


A  Wrestling  Match. 


HOW    TO    MAKE    AN    OUT-DOOR    GYMNASIUM.       l6l 

in  gymnastic  goods  for  two  dollars.  But  boys  may 
make  a  bar  for  themselves  out  of  maple  or  hickory, 
or  by  using  a  large  pitchfork  or  hoe-handle. 
Home-made  bars  should,  however,  always  be  tested 
thoroughly  before  being  used,  and  should  not  be 
used  by  very  large  or  heavy  boys. 

The  greatest  difficulty  arises  in  fixing  the  bar 
firmly.  If  an  old  tree  is  at  hand,  a  hole  about  an 
inch  and  a  half  deep  may  be  cut  out,  into  which  one 
end  of  the  bar  should  exactly  fit. 

Then,  if  a  large  post  or  an  ordinary  piece  of  joist 
can  be  firmly  planted  at  a  distance  of  four  or  five 
feet  from  the  tree,  the  other  end  of  the  bar  may  be 
inserted  in  that.  The  planted  post  should  be  well 
propped  to  prevent  spreading.  The  bar  should  be 
about  five  feet  from  the  ground. 

All  the  feats  on  the  horizontal  bar,  except  a  few  of 
the  more  difficult  and  dangerous,  may  be  performed 
with  the  bar  at  that  height.  But  a  tree  is  not  al- 
ways  available,  and  the  boy  must  often  depend  for 
one  support  upon  the  side  of  a  house  or  barn  or 
upon  a  fence.  If  he  squares  the  end  of  his  bar,  he 
can  easily  arrange  a  support  by  nailing  firmly  to 
the  house  a  piece  of  thick  board  or  plank,  with  an 
opening  cut  to  receive  the  end  of  the  bar. 


1 62  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

The  boara  should  be  thick  enough  to  prevent  the 
bar  from  coming  out  of  the  opening  when  it  bends 
with  the  weight  of  the  performer.  The  other  end, 
of  course,  may  be  supported  by  upright  joist  or 
plank  as  described  above. 

If  a  rough  mattress  of  hay  or  straw  cannot  be 
made,  it  would  be  well  to  loosen  the  earth  on  one 
side  of  the  bar  to  save  any  unnecessary  jars  ;  for 
beginners  are  quite  liable  to  fall  upon  shoulders  or 
back. 

Jumping  standards  are  most  easily  made.  Place 
two  upright  sticks  firmly  in  the  ground.  Drive  in 
nails,  an  inch  apart,  allowing  them  to  project  an 
inch  or  two  for  holding  the  cross-bar.  The  up- 
rights should  be  six  feet  apart,  and  the  ground  in 
front  should  be  firm  and  solid  in  order  to  assure  a 
good  take-off  for  the  jump.  A  small  stick  is  gener- 
ally used  as  a  cross-bar ;  although  many  use  a  small 
rope,  to  the  ends  of  which  weights  are  attached  to 
keep  it  taut. 

A  handkerchief  or  white  paper  placed  on  the  cross- 
bar aids  the  jumper.  These  standards  may  also  be 
used  for  hurdling,  pole-vaulting,  or  high  diving. 
For  the  diving,  a  thick,  soft  mat  is  necessary'. 

The  vaulting-horse   is  a  piece  of  apparatus  not 


HOW    TO    MAKE    AN    OUT-DOOR    GYMNASIUM.        1 63 

well  known  to  those  who  have  not  attended  the 
gymnasium.  But  a  great  variety  of  exercises  may 
be  done  upon  it,  and  a  rough  one  may  be  easily 
constructed,  especially  in  the  country.  Secure  a 
smooth  loof  about  five  feet  lonof  and  from  twelve 
to  twenty  inches  in  diameter,  and  after  rounding  it 
at  the  ends,  insert  four  substantial  and  firm  legs, 
about  two  and  a  half  or  three  feet  long.  One  set 
should  be  about  a  foot  from  one  end  of  the  log,  and 
the  other  two  legs  about  two  feet  from  the  other 
end. 

This  log  may  be  covered  with  canvas,  under  which 
a  little  straw  or  hay  may  be  placed,  or  it  can  be  used 
without  a  covering.  By  attaching  curved  pieces  of 
wood  to  the  log,  pommels  are  supplied  which  will 
greatly  add  to  the  usefulness  of  the  apparatus  and 
to  the  number  of  feats  that  may  be  performed  upon 
it. 

All  kinds  of  vaulting  and  many  easy  tricks  are 
done  on  the  horse. 

None  of  this  apparatus  can  be  constructed  with- 
out perseverance  and  patience  ;  for  trifling  difficulties 
will  nearly  always  arise,  which,  owing  to  the  differ- 
ent conditions  under  which  boys  may  work,  cannot 
be  considered  here. 


HINTS   FOR   YACHTSMEN. 


BY    CAPTAIN    JULIUS    A.    PALMER,    JR., 

Of  the  Atnerican  Shipmasters^  Association, 

I. ON    BOARD. 

LORIOUS  sport  is  yachting! 
It  is,  however,  a  pastime  of 
recent  introduction ;  many 
of  those  who  are  not  con- 
sidered old  remember  when 
its  nucleus  was  no  more 
than  occasional  "  sailboats," 
owned  by  private  parties,  or 
let  for  excursions  ;  now,  from 
the  mosquito  fleet  of  some 
sheltered  bay  to  the  five- 
hundred-ton  steam  yacht, 
able  to  circumnavigate  the 
globe,  the  shores  of  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic 
swarm  with  craft  of  every  size  and  description, 
manned   and   managed  by  volunteer  sailors. 

164 


HINTS    FOR   YACHTSMEX. 


165 


The  earth's  surface  is,  to  the  extent  of  two-thirds, 
covered  with  water,  and  there  has  always   been  a 
proportion    of  the    human    race 
living  upon   the  ocean.      Yacht- 
ing is,  therefore,  a  perfectly  nat- 
ural development;  and  its  possi- 
bilities are,  in  the  future,  greater 
rather  than  less.     This  being  the 
case,  just  as  the  boy  who  enters 
a  store  looks   at   the    European 
buyer,   the  head  salesman,   or 
the  manager  of  some    depart- 
ment, as   the 
holders  of  po- 
s  i t io  n  s    to 
which  he  may 
aspire,    so 
-_-—       from  his  cat- 
boat  along  shore   he 
may     see     the     sea- 
going   yacht,    under 
Off  for  a  Cruise.  ^team  or  sail,  taking 

her  departure  for  the 
broad  ocean,  and  form  for  himself  the  resolution 
that  by  the  time  he  can  hope  to  have  such  a  one. 


m.. 


1 66 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


he    will    know  all    that   is  essential    to   her   proper 
management. 

The  Concord  philosopher,  Emerson,  tells  us  to 
fit  ourselves  for  any  position,  and  God  will  send 
the  opportunity;  ignorance  is  no  disgrace,  but  it 
is  a  shame  to  be  willing  to  remain  ignorant;  so 
the  young  man  who  owns  a  twenty-foot  boat  may 


master,  and  even  practise,  principles  which  will 
make  him  a  better  yachtsman,  and,  if  he  persevere, 
a  thorough  sailor. 

Take  first  the  mariner's  compass,  for  it  is  the 
most  essential  of  any  of  his  belongings ;  we  can 
cross  the  ocean  without  a  chart,  but  not  without 
a  compass. 

"When  ministers  try  poor  sailors  to  teach, 
Compass,  no  chart,  is  the  figure  of  speech." 


HINTS    FOR    YACHTSMEN.  1 69 

I  was  once  on  a  yacht  in  Salem  Harbor ;  the 
skipper  was  a  man  of  experience ;  it  had  been 
foggy,  then  had  cleared  a  trifle,  with  a  light  breeze ; 
and  as  night  was  coming  on,  all  sail  was  made  for 
home  —  that  is,  according  to  the  bearings  relied 
on  by  the  skipper.  I  was  not  just  satisfied,  and 
took  the  liberty,  although  only  a  guest,  to  ask  him 
if  he  had  a  compass. 

"  Oh,  yes !  "  he  said ;  '*  there's  a  box-compass 
down  in  my  bunk." 

I  hastened  below,  and  on  my  return  startled  him 
with  the  information  that  he  was  then  steeringf  due 
east.     The  schooner  was  put  about  at  once. 

Now,  the  nautical  custom  is,  in  fair  weather 
or  foul,  along  shore  or  on  the  deep  sea,  to  never 
lose  sight  of  the  lubber's-point  of  your  compass ; 
the  proper  place  for  a  steering-compass  is  just 
forward  of  the  wheel  or  tiller ;  if  your  yacht  is 
roomy  aft,  a  metallic  binnacle  can  be  fixed  at  the 
right  spot ;  but  if  you  have  only  a  cat-boat,  a  neat 
box  holding  a  small  compass  can  be  secured  to  the 
slide  over  the  companion  way,  or  entrance  to  the 
cuddy ;  thus,  when  you  are  sailing,  you  will  nat- 
urally keep  your  eye  on  the  fine  black  mark  in  line 
with  the  keel,  and  not  fail  to  know  the  course  you 


170  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

are  steering.  The  mariner's  compass  has  the 
needle  fixed  to  the  back  of  the  card,  so  that  this 
latter  moves  on  its  centre ;  the  compass  in  use  by 
engineers  and  surveyors  has  a  fixed  card,  over 
which  the  needle  rotates. 

Then,  as  the  Government  examiners  in  Great 
Britain  say,  "  You  must  be  well  up  on  the  com- 
pass." "  Oh !  but  I  could  always  box  the  com- 
pass," interrupts  one  of  my  readers.  To  begin  at 
one  point,  and  name  them  all  until  you  reach  the 
same  again,  is  pretty  practice  for  the  memory,  and 
that  is  about  all.  You  should  know  your  compass 
just  as  you  know  your  watch  ;  the  face  of  the  latter 
is  divided  into  hours,  minutes,  and  often  seconds  ; 
that  of  the  former,  besides  the  points,  into  degrees, 
minutes,  and  seconds.  Of  late,  it  is  customary  to  use 
the  latter,  rather  than  the  points,  so  that  a  vessel's 
course  might  be  given  as  N.  45°  E.,  instead  of  N.  E., 
the  one  term  being  equal  to  the  other.  Space  does 
not  permit  further  illustration  ;  but  for  a  few  cents  a 
compass  card,  marked  for  both  degrees  and  points, 
may  be  bought,  and  a  little  study  will  enable  you  to 
master  this,  the  very  a  b  c  of  nautical  knowledge. 

By  the  compass  and  chart,  the  distance  of  your 
yacht  from  any  vessel,  or  any  point  of  land,  may 


m- 


The  Winner  of  the  Race. 


HINTS    FOR   YACHTSMEN.  1 73 

be  found  ;   this  may  seem  paradoxical,  yet  it  is  so 
simple   that    it   can  be   explained   in   a   few  words. 
Suppose  that  Nahant,  east  point,  bears  due  west, 
and  at  the  same  moment  the  south  point  of  Marble- 
head  is  seen  bearing  due  north  ;  now,  is  it  not  per- 
fectly  clear  that   if  you   rule   a  line   on   the   chart, 
running  in  the  directions  given  from  each  of  these 
points  of  land,  at  the  very  spot  where  those  two 
lines  cross,  your  yacht  must  be  lying  ?     Or  again, 
suppose  you  are  running  past  Boston  Light,  visible 
twenty  miles,  bound  for  the  north  shore  of  the  bay, 
how  far  are  you  from  it  ?     The  first  bearing  of  it 
you  have  is  W.  N.  W.,  and  you  rule  a  line  from  the 
Light  running  indefinitely  from  that  direction  out  to 
sea ;  in  about  an  hour  it  has  changed  its  bearing, 
as  you  have  sailed  north,  say  five  miles,  so  that  it 
now  bears  W.  S.  W. ;    rule  another  line  to  corre- 
spond ;  now  go  to  the  edge  of  the  chart,  and  ex- 
tend your  dividers  five  miles,  and   move  each  arm 
of  the  instruments  along  the   two   lines  you   have 
ruled ;  there  will  be  but  one  place  where  the  dis- 
tance between  the  two  ruled  lines  is  equal  to  just 
five  miles ;  at  its  northern  limit  is  the  spot  where 
your  yacht  is ;  at  its  southern   is  the  place  where 
she  was  when  you  took  the  bearing. 


174  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

The  compass-card  has  no  needle  affixed  to  its 
under  side,  but  it  is  useful  to  you  in  this  way :  run 
a  stout  thread  through  the  centre,  and  put  a  knot 
in  one  end,  letting  the  other  remain  to  a  length  of 
about  fifteen  inches  ;  now,  when  you  wish  to  know 
in  what  direction  any  place  is  from  another,  go  to 
the  chart,  put  the  card  plumb  with  the  chart's  pro- 
jection ;  that  is,  let  the  north  point  on  the  card  be 
at  the  exact  north,  etc.,  and  keeping  it  thus,  by 
moving  either  the  east  and  west  points  on  a  parallel 
of  latitude,  or  the  north  and  south  points  on  a  merid- 
ian of  longitude,  when  the  string  runs  in  a  straight 
line  between  the  two  places,  on  the  margin  of  the 
compass-card  is  the  true  course. 

When  sailing  your  boat  as  close  to  the  wind  as 
she  will  lie,  if  the  sea  is  rough,  look  over  the  stern 
and  you  will  notice  that  the  wake,  instead  of  being 
right  aft,  is  to  windward ;  slanting,  as  a  landsman 
would  say.  This  means  that  she  is  making  leeway, 
or  that  the  wind  is  pressing  her  away  from  the 
course  to  which  her  head  points,  so  that  although 
the  bow  is  headed  in  a  certain  direction,  the  whole 
body  of  the  boat  is  sagging  off  to  leeward ;  if  you 
glance  at  the  compass  as  you  look  at  the  wake,  you 
will  obtain  the  amount  of  this  deflection  from  your 


HINTS    FOR    YACHTSMEN.  1 75 

Steered  course,  and  allow  it  always  away  from  the 
wind. 

Every  ambitious  yachtsman  should  begin  at  once 
to  learn  both  seamanship  and  navigation ;  there  are 
excellent  manuals,  in  both  branches,  to  be  bought 
at  the  nautical  bookstores.  It  is  better  to  know  too 
much  than  too  little  of  your  craft;  you  thus  avoid 
the  error  of  the  novice  in  the  use  of  the  compass, 
who  nailed  it  down  at  the  course  he  was  told  to 
make,  simply  saying  it  was  the  only  way  —  "the 
thing  bobbed  round  so."  You  are  also  spared  the 
danger  which  attended  the  amateur  master  of  a  new 
steam  yacht,  which  was  found  by  the  inspectors  with 
the  safety-valve  strapped  down  ;  the  excuse  offered 
was,  that  "  the  hole  made  such  a  noise  you  couldn't 
talk." 

Even  in  the  management  of  boats,  there  is  much 
to  be  learned.  Never  keep  the  sheet  of  a  small 
boat  fast  when  sailing  on  a  wind,  if  your  craft  is 
small ;  always  have  a  hand  stationed  at  the  cleat  to 
which  it  is  belayed,  providing  your  boat  is  too  large 
to  allow  you  to  hold  a  single  turn  with  your  hand. 
This  is  the  very  first  principle  of  sailing  a  yacht 
with  safety.  For,  if  the  breeze  freshens,  or  a  squall 
strikes  you,  and  you  slack  the  sheet  of  a  fore- and- 


176  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

aft  sail,  it  becomes  no  more  than  an  immense  flag, 
blowing  loosely  to  leeward ;  your  boat  cannot  cap- 
size, and  the  sail  can  be  thus  lowered  or  managed. 
Directions  for  fair-weather  sailing  are  perhaps 
superfluous ;  but  suppose  you  are  caught  at  quite 
a  distance  from  land  in  bad  weather ;  then  you  may 
have  an  opportunity  to  show  your  seamanship,  for 
seamen  are  made  only  by  rough  weather  and  the 
perils  of  their  calling.  Naturally,  as  a  yachtsman, 
you  would  run  for  a  harbor,  and  would  choose  such 
a  one  as  would  make  of  the  gale  a  fair  wind.  But, 
at  a  time  like  this,  accidents  are  likely  to  befall  you  ; 
you  may  lose  a  rudder ;  you  may  be  in  a  "  single- 
sticker,"  and  your  only  mast  may  be  carried  away, 
or  the  seas  that  follow  may  threaten  to  swamp  you. 
Now,  what  can  you  do  ?  The  first  and  best  thing 
in  such  cases  —  that  is,  a  rule  which  will  apply  to 
most  of  them —  is  to  bring  your  boat's  bow,  instead 
of  the  stern,  to  the  wind  ;  for  by  its  sharpness  she 
will  ride  far  easier,  or  divide  the  combers  with  less 
danger  to  herself.  If  she  is  still  manageable  by  the 
helm,  this  should  be  at  once  done;  if  not,  a  small 
piece  of  canvas,  even  an  open  umbrella,  well  aft, 
where  some  boats  carry  a  little  sail  called  a  jigger, 
will  swing  her  head  to  the  sea.     To  keep  her  there, 


lyS  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

bend  a  bucket  or  tin  pail,  or  more  than  one  of  these 
common  utensils,  to  a  line,  and  throw  it  over  at  the 
bow ;  the  more  line  you  can  pay  out,  the  better 
your  sea-anchor  will  hold,  and  the  resistance  of  this 
drag  to  the  water  will  enable  you  to  ride  the  seas 
with  perfect  ease,  all  the  time  drifting,  instead  of 
running,  toward  the  haven  you  have  chosen.  If 
the  mast  —  sail  and  rigging  attached  —  goes  by  the 
board,  —  that  is,  breaks  off  and  hangs  over  the  side, 
—  cut  it  loose  from  your  boat,  but  do  not  let  it 
go  adrift ;  make  one  end  of  a  line  fast  as  near  the 
centre  of  gravity  of  the  wreckage  as  you  can  reach, 
pay  out  on  the  line  all  you  can,  and  make  the  other 
end  fast  at  the  bow  of  the  boat ;  now,  as  you  drift, 
the  surface-drag,  being  to  windward  of  your  boat, 
will  meet  each  sea  before  it  approaches  you,  and 
thus  you  will  ride  safely  in  smooth  water  until  you 
gain  a  place  of  refuge,  or  receive  the  aid  of  some 
of  your  companions. 

By  the  hints  here  given,  I  desire  to  inspire  yachts- 
men with  ambition  for  their  higher  duties.  By  con- 
stantly learning  something  of  one's  vocation,  its 
pleasure  is  enhanced  and  its  utility  increased. 


HINTS    FOR    YACHTSMEN. 


179 


II. 


SEA-TERMS. 


O  each  profession  beiongs  its  own 
language.  A  full  list  of  the 
terms  in  use  aboard  ship  could 
scarce  be  printed  between  the 
covers  of  this  book ;  but  a  few 
of  such  as  would  be  used  by  a 
yachtsman  may  be  mentioned. 
When  you  go  a-sailing,  you  first 
"  ship  "  (put  in  place)  your  rud- 
der, and  "step"  (put  in  place)  your  mast;  be  sure 
to  get  both  "  pintles  "  directly  over  their  "  gudgeons  " 
before  you  cast  off  the  "  painter"  or  get  "  under  way." 
Suppose  you  wish  to  "weather"  some  dangerous 
rock  "  under  your  lee,"  you  will  haul  aft  the  "  sheet," 
which  last  term  does  not  refer  to  a  sail,  but  to  the 
rope  which  is  fast  to  the  "clew"  or  lower  "  after" 
corner  of  a  "fore-and-aft"  sail.  After  you  have 
made  a  short  "  board,"  let  us  say,  on  the  "  star- 
board tack "  —  that  is,  run  a  short  distance  with 
the  wind  on  the  right-hand  side  of  your  yacht  — 
you  will  have  to  "  go  about,"  and  perhaps  can  make 
a  "long  board"  on  the  "port  tack."  You  are  now 
clear  of  the  land,  and  can  "  gybe  the  boom,"  so  as 


l8o  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

to  let  her  "  go  free  ;  "  after  "  running"  out  to  sea, 
you  put  your  "  helm  down  "  and  "  luff  up,"  so  as 
to  speak  one  of  your  companions.  If  the  latter 
should  be  a  steam  yacht,  it  is  the  master's  duty  to 
"keep  out  of  your  way"  —  that  is,  so  manage  his 
vessel  that  there  shall  be  no  danger  to  your  boat ;  a 
very  reasonable  rule,  since  with  steam  he  can  go 
in  any  direction,  while  you  are  dependent  upon  the 
wind.  But  if  both  yachts  are  under  sail,  then  the 
one  on  the  "starboard  tack"  has  the  "  rig-ht  of 
way,"  and  the  one  on  the  "port  tack"  must  "give 
way."  1  will  not  even  guess  at  the  size  or  the  rig 
of  your  yacht,  but  it  is  safe  to  presume  that  the 
"  clew  of  the  mainsail  "  is  hauled  out  to  the  end  of 
a  boom ;  this  would  be  true  of  a  schooner,  a  sloop, 
a  British  cutter,  or  a  cat-boat.  A  very  few  sail- 
boats now  carry  "  sprit-s'ls " — that  is,  sails  ex- 
tended to  the  wind  by  a  light  spar,  one  end  of 
which  spreads  the  head  of  the  sail,  while  the  other 
is  supported  by  an  "  eye- splice  "  in  a  short  length 
of  rope  fixed  on  the  mast  a  few  feet  from  the  "  gun- 
wale "  of  the  boat.  The  edge  or  part  of  the  sail 
to  which  the  "  bolt-rope  "  is  sewed  is  called  the 
"leech;"  "the  head,  the  foot,  the  after-leech,  and 
the  luff,"  are  the  four  sides  or  edges,  and  any  rope 


Rounding  the  Buoy. 


HINTS    FOR    YACHTSMEN.  1 83 

which  hoists  anything  aloft  is  called  its  "  halliards." 
The  spar  at  the  head  of  your  mains'l  is  the  "  gaff; " 
and  it  is  sometimes  furnished  with  both  "  throat 
halliards,"  near  the  mast,  and  "  peak  halliards,"  near 
to  the  "  after-leech."  Your  jib,  or  three-cornered 
sail  forward  of  the  mast,  has  its  "  jib  halliards  ;  "  it 
also  has  a  "  down-haul,"  while  any  sail  which  is  set 
on  a  boom  has  an  "  outhaul."  A  sail  is  "furled" 
when  it  is  taken  in  and  stowed  in  its  place;  it  is 
"  reefed "  when  it  is  reduced  in  size  by  gathering 
in  some  part  of  it  to  the  yard  or  the  bolt-rope,  t)  ing 
it  there  by  small  ropes  fixed  in  line  in  the  sail  itself. 
These  are  called  "  reef- points,"  while  the  larger 
rope  which  is  securely  passed  in  a  lashing  at  the 
"bolt-rope"  is  called  the  "  earing."  This  takes  the 
strain  off  the  "  body"  (the  central  cloths  of  the  sail), 
and  is  itself  restrained  from  tearing  the  canvas  by 
being  passed  through  an  iron  ring  worked  into  the 
sail.  This  iron  ringr  is  found  wherever  it  is  needful 
for  the  sail  to  bear  the  strain  of  a  rope,  and  is  called 
a  "  thimble  ; "  but  a  piece  of  rope  usually  passes 
around  it  in  a  loop,  and  this  entire  loop,  protected 
on  its  inner  side  by  the  "  thimble,"  is  the  "  reef 
cringle."  You  "  carr)'  away "  a  mast  or  other  spar 
when  it   breaks  away  from   its    fastening,  or  when 


184  THE    ROOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

a  part  of  it  breaks  off.  If  it  simply  weakens  or  be- 
comes unsteady,  it  is  only  "  sprung." 

Let  us  suppose  that  in  your  cruise  you  are  far 
enough  from  land  to  sight  a  "  square-rigged  "  vessel 
inward  bound  ;  she  has  "  hove  to  "  for  a  pilot,  while 
near  to  her  may  be  seen  the  pilot-boat,  usually  a 
small  schooner  "  lying  to."  The  first-named  has 
simply  "  braced  her  main  yards  aback,"  so  that 
there  is  as  much  sail-power  forcing  her  astern  as 
ahead ;  while  the  pilot-boat,  being  desirous  to  re- 
main for  hours  where  she  now  lies,  has  "  shortened 
sail"  —  that  is,  reduced  it  to  just  enough  to  keep 
her  hull  balanced  on  the  waves,  over  which  she 
rides  with  her  bow  pointing  almost  into  the  wind, 
and  drifting  off  to  "  leeward." 

But  the  pilot  goes  to  the  "  bark  "  (a  three-masted 
vessel  with  one  mast,  the  "  mizzen,"  rigged  just  like 
your  sloop,  the  two  others  having  "  yards,"  crossing 
the  masts,  on  which  are  square  sails)  in  a  small 
boat ;  he  seizes  hold  of  the  "  man-ropes,"  one  on 
each  side  of  the  "  Jacob's  ladder"  hanging  over  the 
"lee"  side  in  the  "  waist,"  or  about  half-way  from 
the  bow  to  the  stern  of  the  vessel.  These  ropes 
are  sharply  pointed  at  one  end,  and  at  the  other 
they  have  a  knot  made  not  like  the  one  a  landsman 


HINTS    FOR   YACHTSMEN.  1 85 

would  make,  but  squarely  built  in  the  very  centre 
of  the  strands  by  passing  each  one  of  them  around 
the  "  standing  part."  and  through  the  "  bights  "  or 
loops  made  with  the  strands. 

There  are  few  mechanics  on  shore  that  work  as 
incessantly  as  merchant  seamen  when  at  sea.  If 
not  engaged  in  making  or  taking  in  sail,  they  are 
at  work  on  the  ship's  hull,  its  sails  or  its  ropes ;  and 
they  do  in  their  way  as  skilful,  even  as  ornamental, 
work  as  that  executed  in  silk  or  worsted  by  their 
sisters  and  sweethearts  at  home.  W^atch  a  sailor 
handle  a  rope,  and  you  will  notice  that  he  does  just 
the  right  thing  for  each  emergency  ;  for  example, 
he  will  hoist  the  ensign  aloft  in  a  small  roll,  then 
with  a  twitch  of  the  halliards  he  shakes  it  out,  and 
it  floats  in  the  breeze  ;  he  will  put  a  running  bow- 
line in  the  end  of  a  rope  which  is  "rove"  through 
a  "block"  at  the  "mast-head,"  and  lower  himself 
safely  to  the  deck,  when  a  landsman  could  not  even 
trust  himself  to  knot  the  rope  securely.  For  each 
purpose  he  has  its  appropriate  "  hitch,  bend,  splice, 
seizing,  or  lashing,"  Far  more  of  this  ornamental 
and  seaman- like  work  might  be  done  aboard  yachts, 
so  that,  however  small  the  craft,  she  might  show 
that  she  was  owned  by  a  sailor.     I  thought  in  be- 


1 86  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS, 

ginning  this  article  that  I  might  possibly  give  some 
directions  as  to  this  work,  but  it  is  not  easily  ex- 
plained without  engravings.  Mr.  R.  H.  Dana,  a 
Boston  boy  who  went  two  years  before  the  mast, 
and  wrote  a  famous  book  about  it,  also  published 
a  work  entitled  The  Seaman  s  Friend,  in  which 
may  be  found  plates  of  great  use  to  those  who 
wish  to  learn  how  to  handle  ropes.  It  is  also  the 
most  correct  and  comprehensive  manual  of  sea- 
manship as  practised  on  sea-going  vessels  that  has 
ever  been  printed.  We  should  all  be  proud  of  the 
fact  that  it  was  the  work  of  a  man  of  education,  for 
many  years  a  celebrated  lawyer,  who  followed  the 
seaman's  vocation  for  the  benefit  of  his  health,  but 
perfected  himself  in  every  duty  of  his  station.  So 
great  is  the  fascination  of  the  life  of  a  sailor,  that 
Mr.  Dana  himself  said  to  me,  within  two  years  of 
his  death,  that  he  could  not  go  to  one  of  our  wharves 
and  see  a  square-rigged  vessel  without  feeling  all 
the  old  longing  to  go  to  sea. 


HINTS    FOR    YACHTSMEN. 


187 


HI. STARBOARD    AND    PORT. 


HEN  you  go  a- 
sailing,  remem- 
ber that  every 
vessel  has  a  for- 
ward and  an  af- 
ter part ;  the  for- 
mer is  the  bow, 
the  latter  the 
stern  :  these 
names  are  con- 
stantly applied 
aboard  ship; 
thus,  a  rope  is  made  fast  forward  of  the  mainmast, 
or  a  boat  is  ordered  astern.  Every  vessel  has 
also  a  riofht  and  a  left  side  :  the  former  is  star- 
board,  the  latter  port,  or  larboard  ;  and  in  familiar 
speech  the  two  sets  of  men,  or  watches,  have  been 
sometimes  called  Starbowlines  and  Larbowlines. 
The  words  right  and  le^t  are  not  sea-terms  :  if  a 
man  were  to  say  that  his  bunk  was  on  the  larboard 
side  (although  port  is  more  usual)  he  would  be 
set  down  as  a  mariner  of  experience  ;  but  if  he  said 
it  was  to  the  left,  he  would  be  considered  a  landsman. 


1 88  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

No  one  unacquainted  with  nautical  life  can  realize 
how  incessantly  these  two  words  are  used  at  sea ; 
for  the  jibboom,  there  must  be  starboard  and  port 
guys ;  the  ship  must  have  a  starboard  and  port 
anchor,  a  starboard  and  port  light ;  square-rigged 
vessels,  or  those  with  yards,  have  most  of  their  rig- 
ging alike  on  both  sides,  so  we  prefix  to  orders  the 
word  starboard  or  port,  unless  we  use  instead  the 
terms  weather  and  lee.  It  has  been  proposed  to  sub- 
stitute the  ordinary  words  right  and  left ;  but  while 
with  steamers  or  yachts  no  inconvenience  would  re- 
sult, aboard  sea-going  vessels  such  a  change  involves 
far  more  than  can  be  apparent  to  any  landsman.  An 
order  to  overhaul  the  right  clewline  might  be  ambig- 
uous, but  "  Overhaul  the  starboard  clewline  "  is  plain. 
"  Is  the  wheel  a-port?"  cannot  be  misunderstood  ; 
but  how  about  "  Is  the  wheel  a-left?" 

"Right  your  wheel"  means  to  bring  the  rudder 
in  line  with  the  keel.  All  ancient  steering-gear  was 
identical  with  that  used  by  small  boats  to-day,  or  an 
arm  of  wood  fast  to  the  rudder-head  ;  every  boy 
knows  that  to  carry  this  tiller  to  the  starboard  side 
brings  the  rudder  to  the  opposite  side,  and  thus  the 
bow  of  the  boat  is  turned  to  port ;  the  first  improve- 
ments in  steering  conformed  to  this  rule,  and  the 


HINTS    FOR    YACHTSMEN. 


189 


wheel  itself  moved  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  so  that 
in  old  vessels  a  channel  may  be  seen  worn  into  the 
deck,  where  the  man  at  the  wheel  has  followed  the 
tiller.  Stationary  wheels  came,  moving  the  rudder 
in  the  direction  indicated  by  the  wheel ;  but  the 
terms  were  not  changed.  So  that  to  this  day  the 
man  moves  his  wheel  exactly  to  the  contrary  of  the 
order,  following  the  old  rule  that  the  vessel  must  go 
to  the  side  opposite  that  to  which  the  helm  is  put. 

The  terms  port  and  starboard  only  are  in  use  on 
the  sea :  two  vessels  approaching  must  port  the 
helm  ;  if  sailing-vessels,  the  one  on  the  starboard 
tack  has  right  of  way ;  if  steamers,  one  whistle  in- 
dicates that  each  keeps  to  starboard  ;  two  to  port ; 
at  night  a  green  light  is  carried  on  the  starboard 
side,  a  red  one  to  port  ;  the  distinction  being  easily 
recalled  if  you  remember  that  port  wine  is  red. 


THE   ART   OF   SWIMMING. 

BY    HARRY    E.    ROSE. 

SWIMMING  is  an  art  so  manly,  so  graceful,  and 
so  useful,  that  no  one  ever  regrets  the  trouble 
of  learning.  And  every  one  can  learn,  unless  he 
be  physically  infirm  or  naturally  a  coward. 

Dr.  Franklin  truthfully  said  :  "  The  only  obstacle 
to  the  acquirement  and  improvement  in  this  neces- 
sary and  life-preserving  art  is  fear."  The  coward 
had  better  stay  out  of  the  water.  He  is  safer  on 
land.  But  he  is  not  necessarily  a  coward  who  is 
afraid  to  plunge  boldly  into  unknown  water  —  such 
a  reluctance  is  natural ;  the  best  swimmer,  unless 
he  be  foolhardy,  would  not  do  that.  Some  of  the 
best  swimmers  have  learned  in  shallow  creeks,  have 
practised  alone  until  skilled,  and  then  polished  their 
self-education  in  deep  water. 

The  first  lesson  should  be  taken  in  a  tideless 
river  or  quiet  stream,  the  depth  of  which  you  have 

190 


THE    ART    OF    SWIMMING.  I9I 

previously  studied.  On  entering  the  water,  wet 
your  head  and  neck  thoroughly,  and  before  sub- 
merging the  body  stand  for  a  few  minutes  knee- 
deep. 

Having  fixed  your  eye  on  a  favorable  spot, 
advance  into  the  stream  until  breast-high.  Now 
face  the  shore,  and  prepare  for  striking  out.  Lie 
gently  on  your  breast,  keeping  head  and  neck  up- 
rio^ht,  breast  distended,  and  back  bent  inward. 
Withdraw  the  legs  from  the  bottom,  and  immediately 
strike  them  out,  not  downward,  but  horizontally ; 
strike  forward  with  the  arms  simultaneously  with 
the  feet,  holding  the  hands  like  the  blade  of  an  oar 
when  in  action,  fingers  closed,  the  thumb  placed 
by  the  side  of  the  first  finger,  a  little  below  the 
surface ;  draw  them  back  again  while  gathering 
up  the  legs  for  a  second  attempt ;  and  thus  push 
forward,  making  use  of  the  hands  and  feet  alter- 
nately. The  farther  forward  you  reach,  the  faster 
you  will  swim.  The  secret  of  a  good  stroke  is  to 
kick  out  with  the  legs  wide  apart.  The  propelling 
power  is  secured  by  the  legs  being  brought  from 
a  position  in  which  they  are  placed  wide  apart 
to  one  in  which  they  are  close  together,  like  the 
blades  of  a  pair  of  scissors.     In  this  position  the 


192  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

heels  should  touch  each  other ;  and  in  drawing  up 
the  legs,  the  toes  should  be  pointed  backward 
to  avoid  the  resistance  of  the  water  against  the 
insteps. 

It  may  happen  that  you  will  swallow  water  in 
your  first  efforts  ;  but  this  should  not  discourage 
you,  neither  should  the  fancy  that  because  you 
make  but  little  advance  you  are  not  capable  of 
learning  to  swim.  Every  beginner  has  his  mishaps, 
no  matter  what  the  art. 

Some  lads  will  learn  to  swim  "  dog-fashion " 
quicker  than  any  other  style  ;  and  while  it  is  not 
at  all  graceful,  it  gradually  leads  into  the  smooth, 
even,  scientific  breast-stroke,  and  therefore  should 
hardly  be  discouraged.  Every  boy,  of  course, 
knows  that  "  dog- fashion "  is  that  frantic  motion 
of  the  hands  and  legs  like  a  large  paddle-wheel, 
in  which  more  bluster  and  foam  than  headway  are 
made  ;  and  every  boy  likes  to  swim  "  dog- fashion  " 
occasionally,  often  just  to  "  show  off,"  or  to  imitate 
some  friend  not  so  far  advanced  as  himself.  But, 
•*  dog- fash  ion"  swimmer,  don't  let  such  mimics 
dishearten  you;  keep  right  on,  and  soon  you 
will  master  the  breast-stroke  as  we  have  de- 
scribed  it,  and  by  studying  some   of  the  tricks  in 


THE    ART   OF   SWIMMING.  1 93 

this  article,  you  may  soon  have  the  laugh  on  your 
mockers. 

Having  mastered  the  breast-stroke,  which  is 
adapted  to  long-distance  leisurely  swimming,  the 
next  movement  is  the  side-stroke ;  it  may  be  the 
left  or  right,  or  either.  You  can  accomplish  it  by 
shooting  the  right  arm  forward,  while  the  left,  like 
an  oar,  is  forcing  the  water  back,  and  the  legs  are 
propelling  the  body  onward.  This  stroke,  which 
is  a  powerful  one,  will  move  you  on  like  clock-work, 
and  for  long  distance  moderately  fast  swimming 
is  excellent. 

Then  follows  the  alternate  right-hand,  left-hand 
movement,  or  the  overhand-stroke.  This  is  per- 
haps the  most  graceful  and  convenient  of  all.  In 
reaching  forward,  the  arms  are  alternately  brought 
out  of  the  water,  and  then  curved  so  that  the  tips 
of  the  fingers  enter  again  directly  in  front  of  the 
head.  This  movement  can  be  made  very  graceful 
by  daintily  skimming  the  palm  along  the  surface, 
and  merely  dipping  the  water  before  it  disappears. 
For  short  distance  swimming,  you  will  find  no 
speedier  stroke.  Advancing  the  right  and  left  sides 
of  the  body  alternately,  secures  greater  continuity 
of  motion   and    materially  reduces   the  friction ;    in 


194  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

conjunction  with  the  powerful  propulsion  of  the 
legs,  it  sends  you  along  with  the  speed  of  a  fish. 
As  it  is  very  swift,  so  it  is  very  exhausting ;  it  is, 
therefore,  best  adapted  to  racing,  say  fifty  or  one 
hundred  yards. 

I  once  saw  Dennis  F.  Butler,  the  ex-champion  of 
America,  finish  a  seven-mile  race  against  the  tide 
with  this  overhand  stroke ;  and  he  did  it  in  a  pecu- 
liar manner.  With  every  dip  of  the  arm  his  head 
would  go  under  water ;  and  thus  he  lolled,  yet  fairly 
plunged  for  the  goal,  taking  breath  every  time  he 
turned  on  his  sides. 

The  boy  aspirants  to  racing  honors  will  do  well  to 
practise  this  movement  diligently. 

Back  performances  are  more  easily  learned  than 
those  on  the  breast,  and  floating  is  quite  simple. 

Turn  yourself  over  on  your  back,  as  gently  as 
possible,  elevate  your  breast  above  the  surface,  put 
your  head  back,  so  that  your  eyes,  nose,  and  chin 
only  are  above  water.  Keep  in  this  position  with 
the  arms  and  legs  extended,  the  latter  perfectly 
rigid.  Now,  move  the  hands  from  right  to  left 
horizontally,  fast  or  slow  as  you  choose,  and  you 
will  find  yourself  buoyed  up  and  gradually  moving 
along.     If  you  wish  to  make  greater  speed  or  swim 


THE    ART    OF    SWIMMING.  1 95 

on  your  back,  begin  to  work  your  legs,  precisely  as 
in  breast  swimming,  taking  care  not  to  lift  the  knees 
too  high  nor  to  sink  your  hips  and  sides  too  low. 
Keep  yourself  as  straight  as  possible.  You  are  now 
progressing  finely  —  getting  along  easily  and  speed- 
ily. If  your  arms  grow  tired,  lay  them  on  your 
breast,  but  keep  the  legs  going ;  thus  you  can  rest 
your  arms  ;  if  your  legs  tire,  let  them  remain  quiet, 
and  renew  work  with  your  hands.  Thus  alternating, 
you  will  find  yourself  able  to  cover  a  long  distance 
without  fatiofue. 

Just  at  this  stage  of  progress  you  will  be  anxious 
to  dive.  There  is  great  sport  in  this  ;  but  it  re- 
quires practice  to  dive  "  cleanly." 

Diving  may  be  performed  from  the  surface  of  the 
water,  when  swimming,  by  merely  turning  the  head 
downward,  and  striking  upward  with  the  legs.  It  is, 
however,  much  better  to  leap  in,  with  the  hands 
closed  above  the  head,  and  the  head  foremost,  from 
a  pier,  boat,  or  raised  bank.  The  proper  attitude 
for  a  "  clean  "  dive  —  which  means  without  splashing 
more  than  the  sharp  cut  of  the  hands  —  is  to  place 
the  hands  over  the  head,  close  together,  give  a 
sudden  spring,  and  descend  through  the  air,  heels 
together  and  body  perfectly  stiff.     Your  hands  will 


196  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

cleave  the  way  for  your  body,  protecting  your  head, 
and  you  will  pass  beneath  the  surface  just  like  the 
inimitable  bull-frog  —  the  master-diver. 

By  striking  with  the  feet,  the  same  as  in  swim- 
ming, and  keeping  the  head  toward  the  bottom,  you 
can  drive  yourself  to  a  considerable  depth. 

If  you  wish  to  reach  the  surface,  turn  your  head 
upward  and  work  your  hands,  up  and  down  ;  you 
will  ascend  like  a  flash. 

To  turn  under  water,  merely  swim  in  whichever 
direction  you  wish. 

Some  swimmers  prefer  to  keep  their  eyes  open 
while  beneath  the  surface  ;  I  do  not  consider  it  wise, 
as  the  strain  is  great,  and  often  foreign  substances 
in  the  water  are  liable  to  injure  the  eyeball.  Of 
course,  if  you  dive  for  an  object  at  the  bottom,  you 
will  need  to  open  your  eyes  to  find  it ;  at  other 
times  I  advise  you  to  keep  them  closed. 

Swimming  under  water  is  accomplished  by  the 
ordinary  stroke,  but  take  care  to  keep  your  head  a 
little  downward  and  strike  a  little  higher  with  your 
feet  than   when  swimming  on  the  surface. 

Perhaps  as  easy  a  way  as  any  of  learning  to  swim 
under  water  is  by  beginning,  in  shallow  water,  to 
simply  sink  below  the  surface  of  the  water.     This 


The  Diver. 


THE    ART   OF   SWIMMING.  1 99 

can  be  done  by  letting  the  air  escape  from  the  lungs, 
so  that  they  lose  their  power  of  buoyancy.  The 
beginner,  having  no  fear  of  being  unable  to  reach 
terra  Jirma,  will  learn  far  quicker  in  this  way  to  be 
at  home  beneath  the  surface  than  if  he  attempts  to 
swim  at  the  outset.  When  once  confidence  is 
gained,  all  that  remains  is  to  learn  the  trick  of  stay- 
ing below  the  surface  when  the  lungs  are  inflated. 

If  you  have  successfully  practised  these  lessons, 
you  are  familiar  with  the  three  essential  elements  of 
swimming,  and  in  prime  condition  to  study  a  few 
tricks. 

"  Treading^  water  "  is  a  fine  feat.  To  tread  with- 
out  the  use  of  the  hands,  work  your  feet  up  and 
down,  precisely  as  though  ascending  a  flight  of 
stairs,  only  with  more  speed  and  steadiness.  You 
will  find  this  very  simple,  and  oftentimes  you  can 
stand  where  the  water  is  a  fathom  deep  and  by 
treading  hold  the  hands  high  over  the  head,  and 
make  the  uninitiated  suppose  you  to  be  on  the 
bottom.  In  this  position,  also,  you  can  walk  a  con- 
siderable distance,  when  you  are  expert.  If  you 
want  to  ease  your  legs,  put  your  arms  under,  and 
work  them  horizontally  right  and  left,  as  in  floating. 

The  feat  of  breast-swimming  without  the  use  of 


200  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

hands  requires  strength  in  the  legs  and  back.  At 
best,  but  a  short  distance  can  be  made  in  this  way. 
The  same  may  be  said  of  swimming  without  the  use 
of  the  legs.  But  it  is  well  to  practise  both  of  these 
movements  —  they  may  save  your  life  in  the  event 
of  cramp  or  accident. 

To  show  the  feet  while  floating,  bend  the  small 
of  the  back  downward,  support  yourself  by  moving 
your  hands  to  and  fro  just  above  your  breast,  and 
stretch  your  feet  above  the  water.  Now,  if  you 
wish  to  swim  on  your  back,  feet-foremost,  make 
precisely  the  same  stroke  as  in  breast-swimming. 

To  swim  with  one  hand  out  of  the  water,  say  the 
right,  turn  on  the  left  side,  and  vigorously  use  that 
arm,  and  the  legs. 

If  you  wish  to  turn  while  on  your  back,  keep  one 
leg  still,  and  embrace  the  water  beside  you  with  the 
other  ;  you  will  thus  find  yourself  turning  to  that 
side  on  which  your  leg  by  its  motion  embraces  the 
water,  and  you  will  turn  to  the  right  or  left  accord- 
ing to  which  leg  you  use  in  this  manner. 

There  are  a  variety  of  feats  performed  by  expert 
swimmers  ;  such  as  floating  on  the  back  with  the 
arms  above  the  surface  ;  taking  the  left  leg  in  the 
right    hand    out  of  the  water  when    swimming  on 


THE   ART   OF   SWIMMING.  20I 

the  back ;  pulling  the  right  heel  by  the  right  hand 
toward  the  back,  when  swimming  in  the  common 
way  ;  throwing  somersaults  in  the  water,  backward 
and  forward,  etc.,  for  which  no  particular  directions 
are  necessary,  as  you  will  be  able  to  do  them  and 
any  tricks  which  your  fancy  may  suggest. 

A ,  few  hygienic  hints  for  swimmers  will  surely 
not  be  out  of  place  here. 

Do  not  bathe  too  soon  after  eating ;  an  interval 
of  an  hour  and  a  half  at  least,  should  be  allowed. 
Do  not  bathe  when  tired  out,  either  mentally  or 
physically  —  always  wait  till  you  feel  rested.  The 
best  time  for  this  exercise  is  in  the  forenoon,  be- 
tween breakfast  and  luncheon. 

If  overheated  on  arriving  at  the  water,  do  not  re- 
move your  clothes  until  the  excessive  feeling  of 
heat  has  passed,  and  your  breathing  and  circulation 
have  become  regular  ;  never  expose  the  skin  to  the 
direct  action  of  the  air  when  overheated. 

Keep  in  motion  after  you  have  gone  into  the 
water  ;  do  not  stand  around  chatting  and  lounging. 
As  soon  as  you  have  swum  sufficiently,  dry  yourself 
thoroughly,  put  on  your  clothes,  and  keep  the  blood 
in  circulation  by  exercise. 

Do  not  stay  in  the  water  too  long  —  half  an  hour 


202  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

is  long  enough  for  the  strongest  man.  More  deli- 
cate persons  will  find  that  too  much  ;  for  some,  ten 
minutes  should  be  the  limit.  Fifteen  minutes  is  a 
good  average  for  all. 

If  seized  with  cramp,  endeavor  not  to  be  alarmed, 
but  strike  out  vigorously  with  the  affected  limb,  or, 
turning  on  the  back,  extend  it  forcibly  into  the  air. 
By  paddling  with  the  hands  you  can  easily  reach 
shore,,  or  keep  afloat  until  assistance  is  rendered. 

And,  never,  never  "  duck"  your  weaker  brother! 
The  poor  fellow  might  take  fright,  and  never  again 
essay  to  learn ;  besides,  )'ou  might  accidentally 
drown  him. 

In  conclusion  :  if  you  have  followed  these  sugges- 
tions, not  merely  mentally,  but  in  the  "  aqueous 
element,"  as  the  student  would  say,  you  will  have 
become  dexterous  swimmers,  and  soon  shall  be  able 
to  join  Byron  in  this  stanza  :  — 

"  How  many  a  time  have  I 
Cloven  with  an  arm  still  lustier,  breast  more  daring, 
The  wave  all  roughen'd  ;  with  a  swimmer's  stroke 
Flinging  the  billows  back  from  my  drench'd  hair, 
And,  laughing,  from  my  lip  the  audacious  brine. 
Which  kiss'd  it,  like  a  wine-cup,  rising  o'er 
The  waves  as  they  arose,  and  prouder  still 
The  loftier  they  uplifted  me." 


SPORT   IN   THE   WATER. 


BY   ALEXANDER    BLACK. 


NY  one  who  has  ever  seen 
a  tub  race  —  and  those 
who  have  not  may  be  as- 
sured that  they  have  missed 
one  of  the  funniest  sights 
in  the  world  —  will  remem- 
ber the  screams  of  laughter  and  little  shrieks  of 
momentary  fear  that  come  from  the  spectators 
when  the  first  conspicuous  tub  turns  wrong  side 
up,  and  dumps  its  occupant  head-first  into  the 
water.  For  the  moment,  it  seems  to  those  of  the 
audience  who  are  unskilled  in  swimming  as  if 
the  overturned  racer  were  certain  to  drown.  But 
very  soon  his  head  pops  up  through  the  foam,  the 
tub  is  righted,  and,  if  the  racer  is  skilful,  the  uncer- 
tain craft  is  manned  again.  By  and  by  the  specta- 
tors begin  to  realize,  if  they  never  have  before,  that 

203 


204  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

there  is  really  no  danger  that  any  one  will  drown, 
and  every  new  mishap  brings  more  laughter  and 
fewer  sounds  of  fright. 

In  fact,  while  it  is  easy  for  everybody  to  think  of 
sport  on  the  water,  a  comparatively  small  number 
are  able  to  fully  appreciate  the  idea  of  sport  in  the 
water.  The  seaside  bather  cannot  be  said  to  know 
what  water  sport  means  ;  for  the  seaside  bather,  in 
the  great  majority  of  cases,  does  not  know  how  to 
swim.  Only  those  who  know  how  to  swim  can  really 
know  what  water  sport  is ;  for  only  these  can  know 
what  it  is  to  be  free,  safe,  and  "  at  home  "  in  the  water. 

Probably  water  sports  are  as  old  as  any  other  kind 
of  sports.  The  very  fish  in  the  depths  of  the  lake, 
in  the  shallows  of  the  brook,  or  in  the  clear  green 
depths  of  the  sea,  are  continually  giving  a  hint  of 
the  gayety  that  is  to  be  found  in  the  water.  Life 
under  water  has  many  amusements.  Seals  have  set 
games  that  they  romp  in,  day  after  day,  when  the 
weather  is  inviting.  Naturalists  tell  wonderful  sto- 
ries of  the  fishes  and  of  those  animals  who  can  get 
along  very  comfortably  both  in  and  out  of  the  water. 
And  does  anybody  suppose  that  the  boys  of  antiq- 
uity did  not  follow  the  sportive  example  of  the 
light-hearted  frog  ? 


SPORT    IN    THE    WATER.  2O5 

Among  wild  people  living  near  any  sort  of  deep 
water,  there  have  always  been  water  games.  Indian 
boys  were  experts  in  various  contests  and  festivals 
in  the  water,  and  some  of  the  South  Sea  Island  boys 
seem  to  get  along  about  as  well  in  the  water  as  out 
of  it. 


Winning  the  Tub-Race. 

Tub-racing,  which  is  a  very  old  sport,  is  to  be 
classed  with  sports  in  the  water,  like  swimming, 
rather  than  with  sports  on  the  water,  like  rowing  or 
sailing ;  for  it  is  understood  that  the  tubs  turn  over 
a  good  deal,  and  that  cleverness  at  swimming  and 
manoeuvring  in  the  water  will  come  into  play.  And 
of  course  tub-racincr  crets  its  main  excitement  and 

o     o 


206  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

fun  not  SO  much  from  the  mere  progress  of  the  tubs 
as  from  the  continual  chance  of  accident  —  that  is, 
the  comical  accident  of  the  racer's  plunge  into  the 
water. 

Somebody  who  understood  how  much  delight  was 
to  be  had  from  the  make-believe  danger  of  this  kind 
of  accident,  as  well  as  from  other  absurd  intentional 
blunders,  invented  the  modern  water  circus.  For 
there  is  such  a  thing  as  a  water  circus,  a  circus 
with  a  ring  —  but  a  ring  of  water  instead  of  sawdust. 

Away  back  in  the  old  Roman  days  the  water 
circus  was  a  wonderful  affair.  Arenas  would  be 
flooded,  and  naval  battles  would  be  fought  between 
great  galleys  for  the  amusement  of  the  emperor  and 
the  people.  Things  are  not  on  quite  so  vast  or  se- 
rious a  scale  now,  however  ;  and  the  water  circus,  as 
it  is  seen  in  Europe  to-day,  is  but  one  of  the  fea- 
tures of  an  ordinary  circus.  But,  the  American 
reader  will  ask,  how  can  a  water  circus  be  part  of  an 
ordinary  circus?  Can  they  flood  the  ring?  And 
even  if  they  did,  would  it  be  deep  enough  for  any 
kind  of  water  sport  ?  The  fact  is,  that  they  do  not 
flood  an  ordinary  ring,  which  would  not  hold  more 
than  an  ankle-deep  puddle  ;  but  this  is  the  way  it 
is  done :  — 


SPORT    IN    THE   WATER.  207 

When  that  point  in  the  circus  programme  that 
is  set  for  the  beginning  of  the  water  show  has 
been  successfully  reached,  a  small  army  of  clowns 
and  "supers"  begin  dragging  into  the  arena  sec- 
tions of  an  iron  tank,  which,  amid  much  ludicrous 
play  on  the  part  of  the  clowns,  is  fitted  together 
in  the  ring,  before  the  eyes  of  the  amused  and 
expectant  audience.  The  pieces  lock  tightly  to- 
gether, and  a  huge  roll  of  rubber  that  is  tumbled 
into  the  circle  with  many  comical  struggles  and 
mishaps,  is  spread  out  to  make  the  bottom  of  the 
lake  thoroughly  water-tight.  When  this  has  been 
done,  a  bridge,  generally  with  a  double  arch  and 
a  central  platform,  which  has  been  suspended  over- 
head with  the  trapeze  bars  and  other  circus  para- 
phernalia, is  lowered  to  the  little  lake  and  duly 
fits  into  its  place. 

On  one  side  of  the  ring  —  now  the  lake  —  a 
series  of  embankments  rise  to  the  musicians'  gal- 
lery. At  the  proper  moment,  generally  when  the 
attention  of  the  audience  is  directed  to  the  final 
preparations  in  the  circle  below,  there  is  a  gush 
of  water  from  under  the  galler)',  and  a  fine  cascade 
splashes  its  way  over  the  embankments  down  to 
the    now    completed    tank.       Generally    somebody 


208  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

screams  at  the  first  roar  of  the  water ;  then  every- 
body joins  in  shouts  and  stampings  of  applause 
at  the  sight  of  the  waterfall,  which  dances  and 
sparkles  and  splutters  in  the  rays  of  the  electric 
light.  The  cascade  is,  indeed,  one  of  the  great 
features  of  the  show ;  for  the  electric  glare  changes 
in  hue,  until  the  bubbling  torrent,  from  seeming 
like  a  flood  of  very  green  sea-water,  turns  to  a 
crimson  and  then  to  a  golden  shower,  and  is  once 
more  foamingr  white  agrain. 

And  then,  while  the  water  is  splashing,  and  the 
people  are  laughing  and  chattering,  and  the  band 
is  performing  with  great  energy,  the  clowns  toss 
several  screaming  ducks  into  the  lake,  which  is, 
of  course,  in  a  very  turbulent  state,  and  gives  the 
ducks  a  good  deal  to  do  for  a  little  while.  Very 
soon,  however,  the  ducks  make  themselves  at 
home,  and  the  Spectators  take  as  much  interest 
in  seeing  the  fowl  swim  about  as  if  the  sight 
really  were  very  novel  indeed. 

When  once  the  tank  is  quite  filled,  a  decided 
change  comes  over  the  scene.  A  skiff  containing 
a  young  man  and  a  young  woman — who  is  much 
afraid  of  the  water  —  makes  its  appearance,  the 
young   man   rowing  with  an   air  of  conscious  ele- 


SPORT    IN   THE   WATER.  2 1  I 

gance  and  dexterity.  A  group  of  dancers  comes 
skipping  over  the  bridge  to  the  jaunty  strains  of 
the  band.  Various  picturesque  promenaders  fol- 
low the  dancers.  Then  a  delightfully  solemn, 
matter-of-fact  squire  makes  his  appearance,  fishing- 
pole  in  hand,  and  casts  a  line  with  every  sign  of 
lively  expectancy.  Presently  he  has  a  most  extraor- 
dinary bite,  one  of  those  bites  that  you  read  about 
in  the  fish-story  column  of  the  newspaper.  The 
squire,  amusingly  bewildered,  tugs  at  the  pole, 
and  raises  what  seems  to  be  a  tremendous  fish, 
whose  struggles  spatter  the  occupants  of  the  skiff, 
and  completely  destroy  the  self-possession  of  the 
squire. 

While  things  are  at  this  crisis,  the  spirit  of 
mischief  seems  to  break  loose.  Some  mischief- 
makers  who  appear  on  the  bridge  complete  the 
squire's  anxiety  by  knocking  his  hat  into  the  water  ; 
and  very  soon  the  fisherman  himself  manages  to 
tumble  in,  pole,  line,  fish,  and  all.  A  country 
woman  with  a  basket,  who  is  solicitous  about  the 
squire's  fate,  falls  with  a  great  splash,  and  so  does 
a  dude,  who  has  been  shocked  to  discover  that 
his  shoes  are  wet.  Matters  are  considerably  jum- 
bled   in    this   way  when    a   policeman    appears    on 


2  I  2  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

the  scene.  The  poHceman  wears  beneath  his  uni- 
form a  rubber  suit  which  has  been  inflated  to  a 
wonderful  size.  He  wobbles  upon  the  bridge, 
looking  about  with  great  concern  and  indignation, 
asking  what  all  this  means.  In  his  efforts  to  re- 
store order  or  rescue  somebody,  he  shares  the 
fate  of  the  others,  bouncing  into  the  lake  in  a 
manner  so  absurd  as  to  excite  fresh  screams  of 
laughter  from  the  audience.  The  people  in  the 
water,  discovering  how  buoyant  the  fat  policeman 
is,  at  once  seize  upon  him  as  a  life-preserver, 
and  the  dude  actually  clambers  astride  of  the 
portly  figure,  while  the  spectators  laugh  until  the 
tears  come.  When  the  skiff  has  been  overturned, 
and  everything  in  the  water  is  in  a  state  of  the 
liveliest  confusion,  a  great  spurt  of  water  rises 
through  the  centre  of  the  bridge,  the  spray  of  the 
sudden  and  graceful  fountain  is  lighted  by  flashes 
of  colored  fire,  and  the  water  circus  is  at  an  end. 

I  think  it  will  appear  to  be  quite  natural  that 
the  water  circus  should  be  very  popular.  It  has 
already  appeared  in  this  country,  though  not  to 
the  extent  it  has  been  given  in  Europe.  It  will 
probably  become  more  popular  with  us  as  time  goes 
on,  though  perhaps  an  entertainment  in  which  so 


SPORT    IN    THE    WATER. 


213 


many  actors  have  to  run  the  risk  of  colds  and 
rheumatism  may  not  be  considered  very  promising 
in  our  cHmate. 

But  if  this  should  be  an  objection,  why  is  it  that 
the  latest  and  most 
popular  of  our  water 
games  is  played  al- 
most wholly  in  win- 
ter? I  am  speaking 
of  water  polo,  which 
within  a  few  years 
has  been  growing  in 
favor,  until  it  is  now 
one  of  the  most  cor- 
dially welcomed  of 
all  our  sports.  Tem- 
perature has,  of 
course,  a  great  deal 
to  do   with   a  game 

that  is  pursued  in  the  costume  of  the  swimmer.  In 
the  swimming-tanks  of  athletic  clubs  or  gymnasi- 
ums, the  temperature  of  the  water  can  be  regulated, 
and  the  temperature  of  the  air  can  be  brought  up  to 
the  warmth  of  what  has  been  called  the  "  Turkish 
bath "   atmosphere.     There  is    no    reason   why   the 


S' 

GOAL 

is 

QOAL 

"FULL  BACKS  ° 

LINE 

^ 

HALf    BACK 

urr  END 

mHTEMa 

CENTER 
0 

D 

BALL 

0 

CENTER 

LEFT  END 
0 

mCHTENO 
0 

GOAL 

HALFBACK 

0 

LINE 

oFULL  BACK5  0 

GOAL 

Water  Polo  Diagram. 


214  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

same  conditions  cannot  be  supplied  in  summer, 
when  the  air  is  naturally  warm,  and  the  water  in 
a  tank,  without  artificial  heating,  would  soon  be 
sufficiently  warm.  Undoubtedly  there  has  been, 
hitherto,  little  water  polo  in  summer,  because  in 
the  warm  season  out-door  sports  of  another  kind 
tempt  the  athlete.  Lake,  river,  and  deep-sea  swim- 
ming lure  him  away  from  the  narrow  dimensions  of 
a  tank.  But  as  water  polo  gains  in  popularity,  and 
begins  to  take  rank  as  something  more  than  a  game 
to  be  played  in-doors  and  in  winter,  when  other 
forms  of  athletic  sports  are  comparatively  inacces- 
sible, it  is  less  likely  to  be  set  aside  in  the  summer 
season.  Indeed,  water  polo  is  continually  on  the 
increase  as  a  summer  sport. 

Our  American  water  polo  is  simply  foot-ball  played 
in  the  water.  It  might  seem  more  out  of  place  to 
use  the  term  foot-ball  in  a  water  game  which  does 
not  permit  the  kicking  of  the  ball,  if  modern  foot- 
ball had  not  done  away  with  a  great  deal  of  the 
kicking  that  once  seemed  the  special  characteristic 
of  the  game.  The  fact  that  foot-ball  has,  paradoxi- 
cally, become  so  much  of  a  hand  game,  makes  it 
much  more  feasible  than  it  once  might  have  been 
to  transfer  the  game  to  the  water. 


SPORT    IN    THE    WATER.  215 

Water  polo  is  not  yet  an  exact  science,  either  as 
regards  the  manner  of  the  game  or  the  place  where 
it  is  played.  There  is  much  difference  of  opinion 
as  to  the  proper  size  of  the  tank  in  which  it  should 
be  played.  Some  players  hold  to  a  deep  tank,  in 
which  everybody  would  have  to  swim  throughout 
the  game.  Others  are  much  in  favor  of  a  tank  with 
a  uniform  depth  of  five  feet  or  thereabouts,  so  that 
the  player  could  stand  when  swimming  was  not 
demanded.  Most  of  the  games  thus  far  have  been 
played  in  the  regular  athletic  club  tanks.  These 
are  four  or  five  feet  deep  at  one  end,  and  increase 
in  depth  toward  the  other  end,  until  there  they  hold 
six  feet  or  more  of  water.  Unless  special  water 
polo  tanks  are  constructed,  in-door  games  will  prob- 
ably continue  to  be  played  in  the  tanks  that  are 
comparatively  shallow  at  one  end — although  four 
feet  of  water  is  not  to  be  despised  in  the  opportuni- 
ties it  gives  the  swimmer. 

A  water  polo  team  consists  of  six  men,  who  are 
organized  on  the  same  general  plan  as  a  foot-ball 
team.  Thus,  there  is  a  centre  rush,  two  end  rush- 
ers, a  half-back,  and  two  full  backs  or  goal  keepers. 
The  accompanying  diagram  will  give  an  idea  of  the 
way  the  team  ranges  itself  in  the  water.     The  goal 


2l6  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

boards  are  about  four  feet  long  and  twelve  inches 
wide,  and  on  each  is  painted  the  word  "Goal"  in 
large  letters.  The  boards  are  about  eighteen  inches 
above  the  water-line.  The  goal  line  indicated  on 
the  diagram  is  an  imaginary  line,  running  between 
two  marks  on  the  sides  of  the  tank,  four  feet  from  the 
end.  The  tank  we  shall  suppose  to  be  one  hundred 
feet  long  and  twenty  feet  wide.  As  the  side  with 
the  shallower  end  has  somewhat  of  an  advantage, 
choice  of  end  is  decided  by  toss  at  the  beginning 
of  the  game,  and  the  sides  alternate  in  position. 

Only  the  full  backs  or  goal  keepers  are  entitled 
to  remain  within  the  goal-line  ;  and  it  is  one  of  the 
duties  of  the  judges  or  umpires,  who  stand  each  at 
a  goal,  to  declare  a  foul  against  any  player  who 
enters  the  goal  enclosure  ahead  of  the  ball.  It  is 
one  of  the  rules,  too,  that  the  ball  must  be  carried, 
and  cannot  be  passed,  over  the  goal-line. 

There  are  several  points  of  difference  between 
the  English  and  the  American  game.  In  the  Eng- 
lish game,  as  I  understand,  the  player  is  permitted 
to  strike  or  push  the  ball  with  his  hand.  He  may 
interfere  with  an  opponent  only  when  the  opponent 
has  the  ball  in  his  possession.  In  this  country  a 
player  may  carry  the  ball  in  any  direction,  and  may 


SPORT    IN    THE    WATER.  21/ 

"  tackle "  any  player  who  either  has  the  ball  or  is 
within  three  feet  of  it. 

At  the  moment  before  the  beginning  of  the  game 
the  teams  are  marshalled  on  the  platforms,  at  the 
respective  ends  of  the  tank,  as  determined  by  the 
toss.  It  is  a  moment  of  expectancy.  The  twelve 
young  men  in  their  swimming  costumes  make  two 
attractive  groups.  The  ball,  ready  for  its  lively 
bath,  is  the  regulation  foot-ball.  The  umpires,  time- 
keeper, referee,  are  all  in  place.  The  audience 
gives  signs  of  that  tension  exhibited  at  the  moment 
in  foot-ball  when  the  two  teams,  drawn  up  in  deter- 
mined lines,  await  that  first  movement  of  the  ball 
which  begins  the  excitement  of  the  game. 

"  Go !  " 

The  ball  is  in  the  middle  of  the  tank,  and  with  a 
great  splash  the  players  are  plunging  into  the  water. 
The  two  centre  rushes  are  swimming  toward  the 
ball  from  opposite  sides  of  the  tank,  the  other 
players  scurrying  into  position  behind  them.  For 
a  few  seconds  only  there  is  the  suspense  of  not 
knovvinof  which  leader  will  first  pfet  the  ball.  Almost 
at  the  same  instant  the  Red  and  the  Black  reach  for 
the  dancing  globe.  But' the  Red  gets  it ;  and  quick 
as  thought  he   snaps  it  to  the  half-back,  the  end 


— .^/^ 


SPORT    IN    THE    WATER.  219 

rusher  continuing  to  plunge  toward  the  opposite 
goal.  The  half-back,  clutching  the  ball,  dives  out 
of  sight  for  an  instant,  but  is  soon  seen  on  his  way 
toward  the  left  centre  of  the  tank.  The  centre  rush 
of  the  Blacks  makes  a  great  sweeping  stroke  for 
the  bail,  and  the  left  end  rusher  of  the  Blacks  is 
right  in  the  swimmer's  path.  There  is  a  big  fluster 
of  spray,  and  the  left  end  rusher  of  the  Reds  is  seen 
swimming  with  the  ball  that  was  cleverly  passed  to 
him.  But  the  half-back  of  the  enemy  is  alert,  and 
by  a  swift  side-stroke  wrenches  the  ball  from  the 
daring  rusher,  and  makes  for  the  other  side  of  the 
tank.  Here  two  of  his  team  make  a  lively  effort 
to  keep  a  passage  for  him.  Five  swimmers  are 
soon  in  such  a  tangle  that  it  is  difficult  to  determine 
who  has  the  ball.  Three  or  four  of  the  figures  dis- 
appear beneath  the  foam  ;  and  one  man,  another  of 
the  Blacks,  is  seen  swimming  hard  for  the  Red 
goal. 

There  is  a  great  cheer  from  the  spectators  as  the 
lusty  youth  cleaves  the  water  with  his  free  left  arm. 
But  the  swimmer  can  gain  but  a  few  strokes.  He 
is  seized  by  two  of  the  Reds  ;  he  writhes,  dives,  and 
appears  two  yards  away,  rising,  unfortunately,  under 
the  very  nose  of  the  Red  left  end  rusher,  who  has 


2  20  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

waited  for  him.  Two  other  Reds  are  but  a  stroke 
or  two  away,  and  all  of  them  disappear  and  rise 
again.  The  head  of  the  Black  with  the  ball  cannot 
be  seen  by  the  eager  spectators.  They  are  holding 
him  under.  Yet  he  seems  determined  not  to  o-ive 
up  the  ball.  Re-enforcements  from  both  teams  are 
now  at  hand.  Two  of  the  Blacks  dive  with  the  pur- 
pose of  passing  the  ball.  But  a  man  with  his  head 
under  water  and  three  or  four  men  struggling  with 
him  cannot  discriminate  very  readily  in  such  a  mat- 
ter. The  plucky  fellow,  who  cannot  tell  whose 
hand  is  friendly,  must  soon  let  go  the  ball,  and  who 
shall  get  it  when  he  does  let  go  ? 

Then  all  at  once  two  of  the  players  who  have 
been  on  the  outskirts  of  the  struggle  discover  that 
the  ball  has  come  to  the  surface  a  yard  away  from 
the  outer  line  of  the  scramble.  A  Red  now  has  the 
ball.  He  is  making  straight  for  the  right  of  the 
tank.  The  crowd  of  swimmers  turn  upon  him.  A 
signal  has  told  the  Reds  that  the  ball  is  in  their  pos- 
session. Three  times  the  glistening  rubber  changes 
hands,  the  Reds  still  carrying  it  nearer  and  nearer 
to  their  opponents'  goal.  The  Black  goal  keepers 
gird  themselves  for  the  struggle  beyond  the  goal 
line.     Twice  the   Blacks  get  the  ball.     Twice  the 


SPORT    IN    THE    WATER.  221 

Reds  recover  it.  The  spectators  are  finding  it  hard 
not  to  shout  improperly  loud,  and  not  to  stand  on 
the  seats.  The  shouts  in  the  water  often  end  in  a 
gurgle,  and  a  seething  hum  is  punctuated  with  an 
occasional  splasl^on  the  surface. 

In  the  scramfle  at  the  goal-line  it  is  again  impos- 
sible to  tell  who  has  the  ball,  but  the  Reds  are  hold- 
ing all  the  ground  (or  water)  they  have  taken.  The 
effort  is  to  touch  the  goal-board.  This  is  no  easy 
thing  in  the  presence  of  two  goal-keepers  with  arms 
like  a  blacksmith's.  The  water  is  white  with  foam, 
and  every  swimmer  is  doing  his  utmost  to  turn  the 
crisis  to  the  advantage  of  his  side.  When  the  ref- 
eree's whistle  announces  that  the  Reds  have  won 
the  goal,  a  congratulatory  shout  greets  the  panting 
and  dripping  figures  that  leave  the  water  for  a  few 
minutes'  breathing-time. 

Enthusiasts  in  water  polo  think  that  before  the 
present  summer  is  over  the  game  will  be  established 
in  favor  as  a  warm-weather  sport.  There  is,  these 
enthusiasts  tell  me,  no  reason  in  the  world  why  the 
game  should  not  be  played  in  any  water  that  is  with- 
out current;  and,  even  in  a  river  with  moderately 
strong  current,  it  would  be  possible  to  play  it  across 
stream,  the  goals  and   limits  being  once  definitely 


222  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

placed.  Probably,  however,  the  popularity  of  the 
game  will  result  in  the  arrangement  of  warm 
weather  arenas  for  the  sport,  where  everything  can 
be  done  scientifically  and  in  order.  I  think  it  has 
been  suofo-ested  that  there  is  a  o[^ood  deal  of 
"  science  "  in  water  polo.  While  the  game  is  being 
studied  out,  there  will  be  a  good  deal  of  roughness. 
But  this  roughness  will  in  great  measure  diminish 
as  skill  and  precision  are  acquired. 

Whatever  may  become  of  water  polo,  the  new 
sport  has  certainly  given  a  great  "  boom  "  to  swim- 
ming. All  athletics  in  the  water  are  based  on  the 
swimmer's  art ;  and  when  swimming  is  surrounded 
by  proper  precautions  against  accident,  it  is  one  of 
the  most  healthful  forms  of  exercise,  encouraging 
muscular  self-confidence,  strengthening  the  frame, 
and  building  up  the  lungs.  There  will  always,  I 
suppose,  be  differences  of  opinion  as  to  the  best 
kind  of  stroke.  The  "overhand"  stroke  is  fast  for 
a  short  distance ;  the  English  "  side  stroke "  is 
highly  praised,  and  is  practised  by  many  prize  win- 
ners. But  the  old-fashioned  "breast  stroke"  is  not 
likely  to  go  out  of  fashion  for  a  long  while. 

I  suppose  that  in  that  interesting  future  we  all 
like    to  talk  about  we   shall   have  some  surprising 


SPORT    IN   THE   WATER. 


223 


devices  for  travelling  as  well  as  amusing  ourselves 
in  water.  We  already  have  the  water  bicycle.  Cap- 
tain Boynton's  water-shoes  sound  better  than  they 
look,  and  I  fancy  that  they  look  better  than  they 
feel.     As  might  be  imagined  from  their  appearance, 


The  Water  Shoes. 


these  water- shoes  do  not  permit  a  seven-league 
stride  ;  in  fact,  they  do  not  permit  striding  at  all. 
You  simply  have  a  boat  on  each  foot,  and  must  get 
yourself  along  with  an  oar  or  some  other  means  of 
propulsion.  If  a  person  were  in  a  hurry,  it  would 
pay   to  get    these    shoes    off  and    swim.       Captain 


2  24  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

Boynton's  floating-suit  was  better,  because  it  did 
not  give  so  good  an  opportunity  for  getting  the 
head  under  water  and  keeping  it  there.  With  an 
umbrella  up  to  keep  off  the  sun,  a  little  floating  box 
of  provisions  and  utensils,  and  a  neat  paddle,  Cap- 
tain Boynton  was  really  ready  for  a  long  and  safe 
water  journey. 

But  the  ability  to  swim  well,  and  for  a  long  dis- 
tance if  necessary,  is  worth  all  the  water  apparatus 
that  will  ever  be  invented. 


A   CANE    RUSH. 


BY    MALCOLM    TOWNSEND. 

ID  you  ever  see  a  "  cane  rush  "  ? 
It  is  not  altogether  new ;  for 
when  the  Greek  boys  of  the 
Twenty-third  Olympiad  — 
twenty-five  hundred  years  and 
more  ag^o —  tuoro-ed  and  struor- 
gled  for  the  mastery  in  the  game  of 
strength  and  muscle  known  to  them  as  the  pancra- 
tium, they  were  but  striving  for  the  prize  of  the 
wild  olive  wreath  in  a  rough  and  tumble  game 
which,  centuries  later,  was  to  reappear  in  what  is 
known  in  certain  American  colleges  as  the  "  cane 
rush." 

All  athletic  sports  have  in  them  a  certain  element 
of  danger;  all  of  them,  pushed  to  extremes,  may 
degenerate  into  brutality.     The  deadly  pitching  of 

225 


2  26  THE    BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS. 

the  base-ball  field,  the  "  slugging  "  of  many  a  foot- 
ball match,  have  again  and  again  brought  discredit 
upon  those  noble  tests  of  strength  and  skill.  But 
the  gentleman  cannot  be  a  brute ;  and  if  but  the 
demands  of  courtesy  and  manliness  are  kept  ever 
in  view,  no  field  sport,  however  exciting,  however 
risky,  or  however  absorbing,  need  ever  pass  that 
border  line  that  separates  chivalry  from  brutish- 
ness. 

A  cane  rush  may  be  reduced  to  a  brutal  level, 
and  become  dangerous  to  the  participants.  But 
when  planned  upon  a  manly  athletic  basis,  and 
controlled  by  the  spirit  of  friendly  rivalry,  it  is, 
perhaps,  one  of  the  most  exciting  contests  adopted 
by  the  restless  college  "men."  When  participated 
in  along  the  lines  of  courtesy  and  courage,  it  enlists 
a  Spartan  element  of  honor.  It  is  regarded  as  a 
duty  which  no  loyal  class  member  would  think  of 
shirkinor.  It  cements  a  class  union  that  otherwise 
would  never  be  formed,  enthusiastically  contributed 
to  by  the  many  secret  meetings,  private  conferences, 
and  careful  "pointers"  that  precede  the  day  of 
contest. 

Let  me  describe  for  you  a  cane  rush  in  a  certain 
college,  where  brutality  is  frowned  down,  and  the 


A   CANE    RUSH.  227 

boys    can    be    gentlemen    even    in    the    heat    of 
conflict. 

It  is  the  battle  for  supremacy  between  Sopho- 
mores and  Freshmen  —  the  class  of  '94  and  the 
class  of  '95.  And  the  sign  of  supremacy,  to  be 
borne  away  by  the  victors,  is  the  conquered  cane. 

The  time  at  last  has  arrived  —  a  cool  fall  day. . 
The  combatants  are  full  of  pluck  and  determination. 
After  class  hours  the  rendezvous  of  the  collegians 
is  the  green  field  not  far  away  —  a  piece  of  turf  still 
famous  as  the  scene  of  a  deadly  encounter  between 
two  rival  American  statesmen. 

The  field  is  thronged  with  spectators.  Here  are 
representatives  of  the  alumni,  the  professors,  the 
friends,  the  brothers,  the  fathers,  and  a  goodly 
sprinkling  even  of  gray-haired  grandfathers. 

The  Sophomores  have  had  the  advantage  of 
experience.  The  year  preceding  they,  as  Fresh- 
men, fought  the  "  Sophs"  —  the  Juniors  of  to-day. 
This  apparent  disadvantage  under  which  the  Fresh- 
men enter  the  contest  generally  turns  the  sympathy 
of  the  spectator  to  them,  so  that  they  become  the 
centre  of  attraction,  being  the  new  blood  of  the 
contest. 

The  arena,  or  battle-ground,  is  a  rectangular  plot 


228  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

one  hundred  feet  in  length,  with  its  outer  lines 
marked  and  guarded  by  stakes  and  rope.  A  well- 
sodded  part  of  the  field  is  generally  chosen.  Across 
the  centre  of  the  enclosure  a  chalk-line  is  drawn. 
The  cane  is  a  strong,  smooth,  rounded  stick,  about 
five  feet  in  length,  and  from  an  inch  and  a  half  to 
two  inches  in  diameter. 

Judges  chosen  from  the  alumni  are  detailed  to 
see  that  neither  kicking  nor  striking  an  opponent 
takes  place ;  they  are  also  to  decide  the  final  count 
of  hands  remaining  on  the  cane  at  the  call  of 
"  time."  A  "  hand"  is  three  fingers,  or  two  fingers 
and  the  thumb  ;  both  hands  of  one  party  on  the 
cane  is  counted  as  two  hands.  A  kick  or  blow 
decided  against  a  class  member  is  a  forfeit  of  "  one 
hand "  at  the  final  count  —  a  serious  penalty. 

Signals  are  given  by  pistol-shots  from  the  starter: 
first  shot,  ''make  ready;"  second  shot,  "charge;" 
third  shot,  "  withdraw."  Five  minutes  is  allowed 
between  the  second  and  the  third  shot. 

The  contestants  are  the  Sophomores  and  the 
Freshmen  ;  the  former  are  the  challengers. 

The  men  are  divided  into  five  sections  for  special 
work :  the  Gladiatorae,  or  centres,  who  hold  the 
cane ;  the  Robustse,  or  strongest  men  ;  the  Avelli, 


A    CANE    RUSH. 


229 


or  "pullers;"  the  Salturae,  or  "jumpers;"  and  the 
Palaestrse,  or   "wrestlers." 

"  Time  is  up!  "  announces  the  starter.  Out  from 
the  dressing-room  of  the  club-house  come  the  chal- 
lengers,   the    "  class   of   '94,"   marching  under  the 


<^> 


The  QIadiatoricE  Holding  the  Cane. 


leadership  of  its  captain,  who  ranges  his  men  at  the 
northerly  line  of  the  arena,  forming  his  line  with 
the  strength  in  the  centre,  and  graduating  it  down 
to  the  "light  weights"  at  the  extreme  ends.  The 
"  class  of  '95 "   next   marches  out,  and    in  similar 


230 


THE    BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS. 


manner    is    lined    up    at    the    extreme    south    end, 
ranged  according  to  strength. 

The  costume  donned  for  the  fray  presents  a 
gladiatorial  effect ;  every  man  is  stripped  to  the 
waist ;    the  exposed  parts   have  been  rubbed   thick 


<^ 


The  Palestra  Wrestling  for  Time. 


with  vaseline  to  produce  a  slippery  surface  that 
a  grip  will  not  hold.  The  palms  of  the  hands  are 
heavily  coated  with  resin  to  overcome,  in  a  measure, 
the  greased  skin.  Out  from  under  the  greasy  gloss 
is  outlined  in  yellow,  on  the  chest  and  back,  the  class 
number,  "  '94"  or  "  '95,"  marked  large  and  distinctly 


A    CANE    RUSH.  23  I 

with  iodine.  It  is  a  "flesh-mark"  of  identification, 
as  class  members  are  not  always  recognizable.  The 
heaviest  and  strongest  of  trousers  are  worn  buckled 
tightly  around  the  waist  by  inside  strapping,  twine 
lashing  the  trousers  at  the  feet  around  well-greased 
strong  shoes  that  will  not  break.  Every  means 
is  adopted  to  prevent  the  advantage  of  obtaining 
a  "hold." 

First  shot :  "  Make  ready." 

The  *'  centres,"  two  of  the  strongest  men  from 
each  class,  take  a  position  on  each  side  of  the  chalk 
line.  The  cane,  after  examination,  is  handed  them 
by  one  of  the  judges ;  immediately  the  eight  hands 
twist  and  slide  around  its  surface  to  cret  a  lastin^f 
grip. 

Then  the  class  "yell"  goes  up  from  the  contest- 
ants, who  now  drop  into  a  foot-racer's  position  and 
await  the  word  "  go  !  "  Each  man  sights  the  cane 
and  their  "stalwarts"  who  are  holding  it,  and  in- 
wardly vows  to  do  his  best. 

Second  shot :   "  Charge  !  " 

And  a  hundred  young  men  cover  the  distance  of 
fifty  feet  in  a  twinkling,  and  come  together  with  a 
crash  and  crush,  taking  down  to  the  ground,  almost 
unseen,  the  "  centres,"  burying  them  three  to  four 


232  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

deep  —  each  "  unseen  "  reaching  desperately,  strain- 
ing every  muscle  to  wedge  his  hands  down  to  the 
cane  and  maintain  a  grip. 

Appearing  like  some  immense  octopus  whose 
tentacles  are  human  legs,  this  live  mass  of  humanity 
surges,  oscillates,  wriggles,  writhes,  and  struggles. 
Around  its  outer  edge  the  "pullers"  are  active,  as 
they  reach  into  the  pile  and  grab  a  leg  or  legs,  and 
with  a  "  long  pull  and  a  strong  pull "  drag  out  a 
powerless  wight,  and  fling  him  out  into  the  field, 
where  the  "wrestlers"  interlock  and  down  him, 
keeping  their  hold  to  the  last.  The  outer  field  is 
besprinkled  with  these  wrestlers,  each  with  his  man 
in  tight  embrace — a  realistic  representation  of  the 
dead  gladiators  of  the  Coliseum,  for  in  fact  dead 
they  are  to  a  chance  of  having  a  "  hand  "  on  the 
cane. 

The  squirming  mass,  head  rubbing  head,  keeps 
up  its  straining ;  the  "  pullers "  still  haul  out  their 
victims  and  lessen  the  pile.  Then  new  muscle  en- 
ters the  contest.  With  a  run  and  spring  high  over 
the  mass,  headlong  down  into  the  central  pit  of 
heads,  dive  the  "  fliers,"  and  working  their  way 
through  by  squeezing  out  the  most  exhausted, 
thrust  their  hands  to  a  fresh  hold  of  the  coveted 
cane. 


A    CANE    RUSH.  235 

"Three-quarters  of  a  minute  yet,"  remarks  a  by- 
stander. It  has  seemed  an  aefe  since  that  last  shot. 
Not  a  word  is  heard  from  the  strugglers ;  there  is  a 
bottHng  of  all  the  reserve  air  in  the  lungs.  Grunts 
and  puffs  are  the  only  exhibit  of  breathings ;  the 
centre  fairly  steams  from  the  perspiring  mass. 

Bang !  the  third  shot. 

The  struggle  ceases  and  the  living  mound  dis- 
solves ;  the  upper  tier  is  disentangled,  the  second 
strata  backs  off  carefully,  the  third  layer  is  rolled 
off,  and  then  the  judges,  demanding  stillness,  note 
the  names  of  the  victors  who  hold  the  "  mark  of 
three  "  that  counts  for  his  class.  Swathed  with  per- 
spiration and  dirt,  with  back  tatooed  by  scratches 
of  button  or  shoe,  and  face  etched  with  finger-nail 
or  pebble,  one  by  one  the  rushers  are  picked  up 
and  led  to  quarters,  proudly  passing  inspection, 
and  displaying  their  battle  scars  and  ragged  rai- 
ment. 

The  judges  announce  the  score.  It  stands,  "  thir- 
teen hands  for  '94,"  and  "  sixteen  hands  for  '95." 
The  crowd  shouts  its  approval ;  loud  and  strong  is 
given  the  class  yell  of  '95  ;  and  '93  (the  Juniors), 
who  back  the  winners,  echo  the  Fresh  yell  with 
their  own. 


236  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

It  is  the  first  victory  for  a  Freshman  class  in  the 
history  of  the  college. 

The  victory  gives  the  privilege  to  the  Freshmen 
to  carry  a  cane  for  a  year,  and  denies  it  to  the 
Sophomores  for  the  same  period.  The  buttonhole 
in  the  lapel  of  the  coat  of  each  Freshman  the  next 
morning   sarcastically  carries    to   class  a  miniature 


'Ninety-fliue  I 

cane,  and  each  man  expresses  a  desire  to  see  a 
Soph  walking  with  a  cane,  that  he  can  exercise  his 
battle-won  privilege  of  breaking  it. 

When  the  next  fall  comes  around,  the  Freshman 
of  to-day  becomes  the  "Soph"  of  to-morrow,  and 
must  again  fight  over  the  cane  to  maintain  the  su- 
premacy he  has  won.  A  rough  and  tumble  game, 
do  you  say  ?     I  grant  it ;  but,  as  I  said  at  the  outset. 


A    CANE    RUSH,  237 

a  cane  rush,  when  "  rushed  "  by  young  gentlemen 
who  can  keep  their  heads  cool  and  their  hearts 
friendly,  however  may  go  the  day,  is  able  to  be 
carried  out,  from  start  to  finish,  along  the  lines  of 
courtesy  and  courage. 


HURDLING. 

BY    HERBERT    MAPES.* 

InUrcoOegiate  Champion  at  tfte  High  Hurdles,  1888-89. 

EXCEPT  among  athletes  and  college  men,  in- 
terest in  the  minor  athletic  sports  is,  com- 
paratively, confined  to  so  few  people  that  it  would 
not  be  strange  if  many  young  Americans  had  never 
seen,  nor  even  heard  of,  a  hurdle  race.  Hence, 
perhaps,  it  is  advisable  to  begin  by  briefly  describ- 
ing one. 

As  the  name  implies,  the  race  is  run  over  hurdles. 
The  hurdle  is  of  wood,  and  consists  of  two  uprights 
and  a  cross-bar.     This  cross-bar  is  either  two  feet 

*  Herbert  Mapes,  of  the  class  of  1890  in  Columbia  College,  was  drowned 
while  bathing  in  the  surf  at  Fire  Island,  in  the  summer  of  1891.  He  was  a 
young  man  of  rare  promise,  distinguished  in  his  college,  and  much  beloved 
by  his  classmates  and  a  wide  circle  of  friends.  His  record  for  scholarship  and 
in  athletics  was  equally  high,  and  his  work  at  the  hurdles  was  almost  phe- 
nomenal. This  article  on  hurdling,  written  by  him,  is  here  reprinted  by 
permission  of  his  father,  Mr.  Charles  V.  Mapes,  and  of  the  St.  Nicholas 
magazine,  in  which  the  article  originally  appeared. 

238 


HURDLING.  239 

six  inches  or  three  feet  six  inches  from  the  ground, 
accordinor  to  the  distance  to  be  run.  The  longer  of 
the  two  distances  commonly  run  by  hurdlers  is  two 
hundred  and  twenty  yards,  and  for  this  the  hurdles 
are  two  feet  six  inches  high  ;  the  shorter  distance 
is  one  hundred  and  twenty  yards,  with  the  hurdles 
three  feet  six  inches  high.  There  are  generally  ten 
hurdles,  which  are  set  across  a  track,  or  path,  made 
either  of  fine  cinders  or  of  turf.  When  arranored 
for  the  race,  these  ten  hurdles  are  technically  known 
as  a  "  flight."  The  contestants  are  drawn  up  in  a 
line  a  few  yards  from  the  first  hurdle,  and  at  a  given 
signal  they  run  and  jump  each  hurdle  in  -succession, 
the  one  who  first  reaches  the  finish-line  being  the 
winner. 

Now,  hurdling,  being  merely  a  combination  of 
running  and  jumping,  might  appear  to  require  no 
special  ability.  Some  people  foolishly  believe  that 
any  boy  who  has  long  legs  must  be  a  fast  runner ; 
and,  more  reasonably,  those  of  better  judgment 
might  be  led  to  infer  that  a  good  runner  and 
jumper  must  necessarily  be  a  good  hurdler.  But 
experience  has  shown  that  this  is  not  the  case. 
Not  every  good  runner  and  jumper  makes  a  good 
hurdler ;  and,  strangely  enough,  some  of  the  most 


HURDLING.  241 

celebrated  hurdlers  have  been  neither  very  fast 
runners  nor  exceptionally  good  junipers.  For,  be- 
sides skill  in  running  and  jumping,  other  qualities 
are  necessary  ;  and  it  is  in  these  that  the  true  genius 
for  hurdling  seems  to  lie.  Without  special  skill, 
which  can  come  only  after  long  practice,  success  in 
hurdling  is  not  to  be  attained. 

It  is  difficult  with  few  words  to  make  clear  in  just 
what  this  skill  consists,  or  why  so  much  practice  is 
necessary.  Perhaps  the  best  way  to  explain  matters 
is  to  indicate  some  of  the  difficulties  that  appear 
before  the  new  hurdler  when  he  begins  his  training. 
Suppose,  for  instance,  he  is  training  for  the  shorter 
race  of  a  hundred  and  twenty  yards,  where  the 
hurdles  are  three  feet  and  six  inches  hiorh,  and 
are  set  ten  yards  apart. 

Like  all  other  athletes,  the  hurdler  must  undergo 
a  regular  course  of  training  in  order  to  acquire 
strength  and  endurance;  but  from  the  very  begin- 
ning he  concentrates  his  attention  more  especially 
upon  his  "style."  The  first  particular  to  be  con- 
sidered is,  naturally,  the  manner  of  jumping  over 
the  hurdle.  As  the  race  is  one  of  speed,  it  is  of 
great  importance  for  him  to  learn  to  clear  the 
hurdles  with  as  little  room  to   spare  as   possible. 


242  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

He  must  learn  to  "take"  the  hurdle  without  chan- 
ging his  stride  or  stopping  his  speed,  —  in  such  a 
way  that  jumping  the  hurdle  comes  as  near  as 
possible  to  running  over  the  hurdle.  With  this 
end  in  view,  he  sets  up  a  single  hurdle  and  betakes 
himself  to  practising  the  jump.  When  in  this  he 
has  succeeded  to  his  satisfaction,  he  sets  up  two 
hurdles,  and  practises  taking  them  in  succession. 
And  here  a  new  and  very  important  question  arises. 

The  hurdles  are  ten  yards  apart  ;  and  after  he  has 
jumped  the  first  and  run  to  the  second,  he  very  often 
finds  himself  comings  before  it  with  his  wrong-  foot 
foremost.  In  order  to  jump,  he  must  slacken  his 
pace  and  change  his  stride.  Here  is  a  difficulty. 
He  must  devise  some  way  of  jumping  the  hurdles 
in  succession  without  hesitatino-  between  them. 
There  are  two  or  three  methods  of  doing  this, 
though  one  method  has  come  to  be  regarded  as 
the  right  one. 

In  the  first  place,  he  may  practise  jumping  from 
the  wrong  or  awkward  foot,  and  so  be  prepared  to 
jump  in  whichever  way  he  may  come  to  the  hurdle. 
But  the  hurdles  are  too  high  to  make  this  plan 
practicable,  and  it  is  generally  abandoned  after  a 
few  days'  trial.     (It  is,  however,  only  in  the  shorter 


HURDLING.  243 

race  that  the  hurdles  are  so  high  as  to  prevent 
this  method  from  being  successful.  The  low 
hurdles,  two  feet  six  inches  high,  used  for  the 
longer  race,  have  been  jumped  from  alternate  feet 
with  notable  success  by  A.  F.  Copeland,  the 
American  champion.) 

With  the  high  hurdles  there  is  but  one  good 
method.  A  hurdler  must  either  shorten  his  natural 
stride  and  learn  to  take  five  steps  beween  hurdles, 
or  he  must  lengthen  it  considerably  and  take  only 
three.  In  either  case  he  is  brouo^ht  to  the  sue- 
cessive  hurdles  with  the  same  foot.  But  taking 
five  steps  makes  the  stride  too  short  to  allow  of 
fast  running ;  and,  although  many  of  the  poorer 
hurdlers  have  used  this  method,  it  cannot  be  re- 
garded as  successful.  So  there  is  nothing  for  the 
hurdler  to  do  but  continually  to  practise  taking 
three  long  strides,  until  this  becomes  natural  to 
him. 

Even  when  the  hurdler  has  learned  to  jump  low 
and  fast,  and  to  take  three  strides  between  the 
hurdles,  the  development  of  "style"  is  hardly  more 
than  begun.  There  are  a  thousand  and  one  re- 
quirements in  the  turn  and  twist  used  in  the  jump ; 
and  it  is  in  the  methods  of  taking  the  hurdle  that 


244  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

the  marked  differences  between  advanced  hurdlers 
are  shown.  Here  the  individuality  of  each  hurdler 
asserts  itself.  After  he  has  attained  a  certain  de- 
gree of  proficiency,  his  attention  is  confined  almost 
wholly  to  perfecting  his  "  turn,"  the  aim  always 
being  to  clear  the  hurdle  as  closely  as  possible  with- 
out interfering  with  speed  or  stride 

This,  as  might  be  supposed,  leads  to  frequent 
accidents,  and  is  the  chief  source  of  danger  in 
hurdling.  In  his  anxiety  to  take  the  hurdle  closely, 
the  hurdler  sometimes  jumps  too  low  and  strikes 
the  hurdle  ;  the  result  in  many  cases  being  a  heavy 
fall  on  the  cinder-path.  But  it  takes  a  strong 
knock  to  tumble,  or  even  to  stagger,  an  experienced 
hurdler.  Indeed,  the  best  hurdlers  have  been 
known  to  win  races  in  which  they  struck  nearly 
every  hurdle,  and  even  knocked  down  a  number 
as  they  went  along. 

A.  A.  Jordan,  the  celebrated  hurdler  of  the  New 
York  Athletic  Club,  contracted  the  habit  of  striking 
hurdles  to  an  extreme  degree.  Yet  this  did  not 
seem  to  interfere  in  the  least  with  his  success ;  nor 
did  it  mar  the  beauty  of  his  style,  which  was  per- 
haps better  than  that  of  any  hurdler  who  had  then 
appeared  in  America.     He  was  the  first  exponent 


Hurdling  on  Skates  In  Canada. 


246  THE    BOOK    OV    ATHLETICS. 

of  the  peculiar  finished  style  that  has  been  adopted 
by  so  many  leading  hurdlers  of  to-day  ;  and,  indeed, 
he  might  perhaps  be  called  the  "  Father  of  Ameri- 
can Hurdling."  He  and  Copeland  of  the  Manhat- 
tan Athletic  Club  were  at  one  time  the  best-known 
hurdlers  in  America,  and  their  struggles  for  suprem- 
acy have  been  hard-fought  and  brilliant. 

After  a  hurdler  has  perfected  his  style,  and  is  in 
the  pink  of  condition,  all  ready  for  the  race,  there 
is  no  prettier  sight  on  the  athletic  field  than  to  see 
him  taking  a  practice-spin  over  the  whole  flight  of 
hurdles.  True  and  stroncr  in  his  motions,  run  nine 
and  jumping  with  all  his  might,  he  yet  rises  and 
falls  lightly  as  a  bird,  handling  himself  so  gracefully 
withal,  that,  to  a  mere  observer,  the  sport  appears  to 
be  without  difficulty. 

The  real  question  of  supremacy  each  year  con- 
cerns only  three  or  four  hurdlers,  who  make  the 
great  championship  struggle.  All  the  others  can 
expect  only  lesser  honors,  though  always  there  are 
many  who  have  secret  hopes  of  improving  sufificiently 
to  enter  the  first  rank.  In  order  to  provide  oppor- 
tunity and  incentive  for  the  mass  of  athletes  of  no 
special  distinction,  numerous  handicap  races  are  held, 
in  which  the  different  competitors  are  allowed  starts 


HURDLING.  247 

according  to  their  supposed  abilities.  Of  course 
there  is  no  g^reat  interest  at  stake  in  these  o^ames 
beyond  the  individual  desire  to  win.  Even  for  the 
novice  the  honor  of  victory  is  much  diminished  on 
account  of  the  handicap  in  his  favor ;  and  among 
athletes  the  winnincr  or  losinor  in  such  cases  is  con- 
sidered  of  less  importance  than  the  merit  of  the 
performances.  But  for  all  that,  there  is  always 
a  certain  satisfaction  in  being  victorious  ;  and  the 
prizes  given,  in  themselves,  make  success  worth 
striving  for. 

From  this  fact  there  is  quite  a  large  class  of 
athletes,  called  "  mug-hunters,"  who  have  no  further 
ambition  than  to  win  as  many  of  these  handicap 
games  as  possible.  As  it  is  essential  to  their  suc- 
cess that  they  should  have  big  handicaps,  they  use 
every  means  to  conceal  their  true  ability,  whatever 
it  may  be,  and  always  take  pains  to  win  a  race  by 
no  more  than  is  absolutely  necessary.  Fortunately, 
however,  such  athletes  are  hardly  more  than  tolerated ; 
and  the  name  "  muof-hunter "  has  come  to  be  used 
as  a  term  of  reproach. 

A  handicap  hurdle-race,  although  there  are  no 
great  interests  at  stake,  is  a  very  pretty  sight. 
When  the  contestants  take  their  positions  for  the 


248  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

race,  it  looks  like  a  hopeless  struggle  for  the 
"  scratch"  man  (that  is,  the  one  who  stands  farthest 
back  of  all  the  contestants,  and  who  allows  "  starts  " 
to  all  the  others.  He  is  called  the  "scratch"  man 
because  he  toes  the  "  scratch,"  or  line,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  course).  Often  he  is  small  in  stature, 
as  is  Copeland,  for  instance  ;  and  when  he  stands 
there  with  the  other  contestants,  many  of  them 
larger  and  stronger  than  he,  and  some  of  them  ten 
or  fifteen  yards  in  advance  of  him,  the  arrangement 
appears  altogether  unfair,  and  the  spectator,  who  is 
likely  to  regard  the  "  scratch  "  man's  chance  as  hope- 
less, is  filled  with  sympathy  for  him.  When  all  is 
ready,  the  starter  calls  out,  "  On  your  marks  !  "  All 
stand  upright  in  their  positions.  "  Settle."  They 
all  lean  forward,  ready  for  the  start.  "  Bang  !  "  goes 
the  pistol,  and  they  are  off!  The  leaders  are  almost 
to  the  second  hurdle  before  the  "  scratch "  man 
reaches  the  first ;  it  seems  impossible  that  he  should 
overtake  them.  But  now  see  skill  and  speed  tell. 
While  they  rush  and  jump  clumsily  and  high,  lum- 
bering along  with  all  their  might,  truly  and  prettily 
he  skims  the  hurdles  and  flies  over  the  eround.  Yet 
the  handicap  seems  too  large,  and  they  are  three- 
quarters  through  the   race  before  he  has  had  time 


250  THE    BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS. 

even  to  close  up  the  gap  between  himself  and  the 
man  nearest  him.  As  they  draw  closer  to  the  finish, 
his  speed  seems  to  increase  ;  and  he  shoots  by  them 
one  by  one,  until,  when  the  last  hurdle  is  reached, 
he  is  abreast  of  the  leader.  Then  with  a  burst  of 
speed  he  rushes  for  the  tape,  and  wins  the  race ! 

Of  course  the  "  scratch"  man  does  not  always  win  ; 
but  if  he  is  in  his  best  condition,  he  is  not  likely  to 
be  beaten.  At  all  events  he  is  sure  to  give  a  fine 
exhibition,  because  to  be  "scratch"  he  must  be  a 
good  hurdler,  and  often  he  is  the  champion. 

Far  greater,  however,  in  real  interest  than  any 
handicap  event  are  the  great  "  scratch  "  races  of  the 
year,  the  amateur  championships  and  the  intercolle- 
giates,  where  only  the  best  of  amateur  and  college 
hurdlers  compete,  and  all  start  even.  The  intercol- 
legiate contests  are,  perhaps,  even  more  exciting 
than  the  championships,  because  college  rivalries, 
as  well  as  those  of  friends  and  contestants,  are  con- 
cerned in  the  result.  For  some  five  months  each 
representative  has  been  faithfully  training  in  prepa- 
ration for  the  great  race  that  lasts  only  a  few  seconds. 
A  single  misstep,  and  he  feels  that  all  the  work  goes 
for  nothing ;  his  college  may  lose  the  cup,  and  there 
is  a  year's  disappointment  before  him. 


HURDLING.  251 

It  is  no  wonder  that  the  boys  are  nervous  as  they 
take  their  places  and  wait  for  the  start.  But  when 
once  the  signal  is  given  and  they  are  off,  all  is  for- 
gotten ;  the  race  has  begun,  and  every  one  flies  over 
the  hurdles,  conscious  only  that  the  supreme  moment 
has  come,  and  that  he  is  rushing  on  for  victory. 


THE  RUNNING  BROAD  JUMP. 

BY    E.    B.    BLOSS, 

Intercollegiate  Cliamfiion  of  1892-93. 

IN  explaining  my  method  of  broad  jumping,  I  think 
I  can  arrive  at  greater  clearness  by  dividing  the 
subject  into  several  parts,  and  treating  the  reader 
as  one  entirely  unacquainted  with  the  sport. 

In  the  first  place,  it  is  very  necessary  for  the 
athlete  to  go  to  work  systematically  ;  otherwise  it 
will  be  impossible  to  attain  satisfactory  results. 
He  should,  first  of  all,  find  out  where  his  "  marks" 
come.  He  can  do  this  by  starting  at  the  farther 
end  of  the  jumping-path,  and  running  toward  the 
take-off  at  the  top  of  his  speed.  It  will  be  only  after 
repeated  trials  that  his  jumping-foot  will  strike  the 
take-off  exactly.  Having  succeeded  in  this,  let  him 
trace  back  his  strides,  and,  at  a  convenient  distance 
from  the  take-off,  make  his  first  or  front  mark. 
The   number  of  strides   should   be    determined    by 


THE  RUNNING  BROAD  JUMP.         253 

the  athlete  himself,  who  knows  best  how  much 
ground  he  must  cover  before  he  gets  up  his  great- 
est speed.  I  am  in  the  habit  of  counting  back  nine 
strides,  which  is  just  fifty-nine  feet  from  the  take- 
off. Suppose  the  athlete  counts  back  this  number. 
At  the  point  where  the  ninth  stride  comes,  let  him 
make  a  mark  along  the  running-path  ;  then  from 
this  mark  count  back  about  a  dozen  more  strides, 
and  make  a  second  mark.  Now  he  has  his  two 
marks,  and  can  feel  reasonably  sure  that  if  he  starts 
from  the  second,  strikes  the  front  mark  squarely 
with  his  jumping-foot,  and  then  runs  nine  strides 
at  the  top  of  his  speed,  he  will  hit  his  take-off 
exactly  and  make  a  good  jump.  Various  condi- 
tions, however,  may  alter  somewhat  the  position 
of  this  front  mark.  If  the  wind  happens  to  be 
blowing  noticeably  in  the  athlete's  face  or  on  his 
back,  it  will  have  the  effect,  respectively,  of  short- 
ening or  of  lengthening  his  stride,  and  the  mark 
should  be  moved  accordingly.  Again,  the  fact 
that  the  running-path  has  just  been  rolled  hard, 
or  chances  to  be  wet  and  heavy,  should  also  cause 
the  position  of  the  mark  to  be  altered.  Neglect  to 
attend  to  these  seeming  trifles  may  spoil  the  ath- 
lete's run,  and  prevent  him  from  doing  himself  justice. 


2  54  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

Next  let  us  learn  how  to  run  up  to  the  take-off 
properly.  The  athlete,  having  started  with  his  right 
foot  on  the  second  mark,  should  run  toward  his 
front  mark  at  such  a  rate  of  speed  that  he  will 
neither  fall  short  of  striking  it,  nor  go  over  it  alto- 
gether. If  he  fails  to  strike  his  front  mark  fairly, 
it  is  better  to  go  back  and  try  again  rather  than 
to  take  his  chances,  especially  as  there  is  no  pen- 
alty against  it.  Now,  suppose  he  has  reached  his 
front  mark  all  right,  and  is  going  at  the  top  of  his 
speed  toward  the  take-off.  As  he  is  reasonably 
sure  of  hitting  the  latter  fairly,  he  can  run  ahead 
confidently,  but  he  must  not  allow  the  length  of 
his  nine  strides  to  the  take-off  to  vary  in  the 
least ;  otherwise  he  will  not  strike  it  properly.  It 
is  not  difficult  to  keep  the  strides  even,  as  the 
athlete  has  only  to  run  naturally,  with  the  body 
bent  well  forward,  the  arms  swinging  regularly, 
and  his  sole  thought  that  of  jumping  strongly  on 
reaching  the  take-off.  If  he  steps  over  the  take- 
off even  a  few  inches,  his  foot  will  sink  into  a 
hollow  dug  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  jumping- 
beam,  and  he  will  make  what  is  called  a  foul,  which 
counts  as  one  of  his  trials.  There  is  but  little 
danger  of  spraining  the  ankle  on  a  foul ;  that  fear, 


THE  RUNNING  BROAD  JUMP.  255 

therefore,  should  never  be  in  mind,  for  it  is  liable  to 
worry  him  out  of  his  best  performance.  On  the 
other  hand,  if  the  athlete  fails  to  get  up  to  the  take- 
off, he  must  lose  just  as  much  of  his  jump.  This 
is  because  his  jump  is  not  the  actual  distance  he 
covers,  but  the  distance  from  the  opposite  side  of 
the  take-off  to  the  place  where  he  first  breaks 
ground  in  the  jumping-box.  Bearing  these  points 
in  mind,  he  will  see  the  necessity  of  compelling 
himself  to  keep  cool,  and  will  use  his  strength  with 
greatest  effect. 

Now  as  to  the  act  of  jumping  itself.  Before  the 
very  last  stride,  and  while  running  at  the  top  of  his 
speed,  let  the  athlete  gather  himself  together  for 
the  effort.  He  should  bend  his  legs  under  him,  get 
down  as  low  as  his  high  speed  permits,  fix  his  eye 
on  some  high  distant  object  (to  secure  elevation), 
concentrate  his  strength  in  his  back  and  hips,  and 
then  throw  himself  into  the  air.  All  these  things 
are  done  in  a  flash,  naturally,  and  not  mechanically. 
It  is  necessary,  however,  to  omit  none  of  them  if 
the  athlete  wishes  really  to  out-do  himself.  Now, 
just  as  he  hits  the  take-off,  let  him  snap  his  right  leg 
(if  that  is  his  jumping-leg)  up  as  high  as  he  can, 
and  then  push  it  down  on  the  take-off  with  all  his 


256  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

power,  at  the  same  time  jerking  both  arms  up 
quickly.  The  snap  and  push  will  lend  the  athlete 
additional  power,  and  the  jerk-up  of  the  arms  give 
elevation,  an  essential  to  a  long  jump.  Just  after 
leaving  the  take-off,  let  him  curl  the  legs  under  his 
body,  bend  the  head  forward,  and  hold  the  arms 
rigidly  at  the  side  with  every  muscle  in  the  body 
perfectly  taut,  so  that  his  own  weight  will  not  bring 
him  down  immediately.  Then,  as  he  feels  himself 
about  to  land,  he  should  have  sufficient  presence  of 
mind  to  kick  his  legs  forward,  bend  the  head  still 
further  over,  and  alight  in  that  position.  These 
latter  movements  will  add  a  few  inches  to  the  jump, 
and  that  is  what  he  needs.  It  will  be  seen  that  the 
jump  is  over  in  a  few  seconds,  and  the  athlete  may 
at  first  fail  to  act  on  all  these  suggestions.  Repeated 
trials,  however,  will  impress  them  upon  him,  and 
in  a  little  time  he  will  find  himself  observing  them, 
almost  without  thinking. 

It  is  well  that  the  athlete  should  acquaint  himself 
with  the  act  of  landing ;  that  is,  lighting  in  the 
jumping-box.  The  method  I  use  is  to  land  with  my 
feet  together;  thereby  obviating  all  danger  of  losing 
my  balance,  falling  back,  and  spoiling  my  jump. 
The  athlete  should  also  steady  himself  for  a  moment 


THE  RUNNING  BROAD  JUMP.         257 

after  landing,  and  get  out  of  the  dirt  feet  first, 
breaking  the  layer  of  dirt  no  more  than  is  absolutely 
necessary.  A  little  care  may  mean  several  inches 
to  the  jump.  Finally,  it  is  also  well  for  the  athlete 
to  see  to  it  that  the  measurements  are  correct. 

In  conclusion,  perhaps  it  is  not  out  of  place  to 
make  a  few  general  remarks  as  to  the  broad  jump. 
The  athlete  should  remember  never  to  jump  without 
first  limbering  himself  by  a  brisk  dash,  for  he  runs 
the  liability  of  sjiapping  a  cord,  and  forever  ruining 
himself  for  competition.  He  should  not  jump  his 
best  on  the  first  trial  unless  he  has  been  allowed 
several  preliminary  jumps.  But  on  the  second  trial 
let  him  go  in  to  win ;  and,  if  he  gets  a  place  in  the 
finals,  strive  to  improve  on  every  effort.  If  possible, 
the  athlete  should  keep  his  head,  even  under  the 
most  trying  circumstances ;  because  the  moment  he 
becomes  rattled  his  skill  departs,  and  actual  strength 
counts  for  little.  Half  a  dozen  jumps  twice  a  week 
should  be  sufficient  to  keep  a  man  in  form  ;  and  a 
complete  rest  of  three  or  four  days  before  a  com- 
petition (provided  the  period  of  training  has  been 
rather  long)  is  oftentimes  the  best  thing  that  can 
be  done.  It  is  a  good  plan  also  for  the  athlete 
sometimes  to  do  "  staying-up"  work,  running,  say, 


258  THE    BOOK    OK   ATHLETIC^;. 

a  brisk  quarter  of  a  mile  once  a  week.  On  days 
when  he  is  not  jumping,  the  training  need  only 
consist  in  running  short  dashes  in  order  to  get 
up  speed.  As  to  diet,  it  need  not  be  so  heroic 
with  the  jumpers  as  with  athletes  whose  work  de- 
pends more  on  real  power  and  less  on  nervous 
strength;  if  he  keeps  his  stomach  in  good  condition, 
and  does  not  partake  too  freely  of  liquids,  he  should 
be  able  to  jump  without  exhaustion  and  in  good 
form. 

Such  is  the  method  which  I  have  followed,  and 
such  are  the  various  observations  that  experience  in 
competition  for  several  years  enables  me  to  make. 
I  can  see  no  reason  why  others,  with  fairly  strong 
natural  ability  and  aptitude  for  jumping,  should 
not  be  fully  as  successful  as  I  have  been,  or  per- 
haps beat  the  record  that  I  have  been  able  to 
make. 


SKATING. 

BY   CHARLES    R.    TALBOT. 

FOR  your  first  lesson  in  skating,  choose  a  piece 
of  ice  of  moderate  roughness.  Take  plenty 
of  time  to  learn  to  stand  well  and  safely  on  your 
skates,  and  to  get  confidence.  Your  danger  as  to 
falling  is  not,  remember,  of  falling  to  one  side,  but 
backward  or  forward.  Learn  to  stand  up  straight. 
There  is  nothing  so  awkward  as  a  skater  who  leans 
forward.  Avoid,  too,  swinging  the  arms  about. 
They  should  be  carried  easily,  much  as  in  walking. 
Keep  the  feet  close  together,  toes  turned  out,  and 
the  leers  straiofht  and  firm. 

Having  come  to  feel  somewhat  at  home  upon 
your  skates,  and  being  able,  perhaps,  to  move 
about  a  little,  you  may  begin  at  once  upon  the 
Plain  Forward  Movement.  With  the  left  foot  firmly 
planted,  the  inner  edge  of  its  skate  bearing  a  little 
on  the  ice,  boldly  throw  out  the  right  foot  until  the 

259 


260  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

outer  edgG  of  its  skate  touches  the  ice.  At  the 
same  time  throw  the  right  shoulder  steadily  forward, 
and  keep  the  body  balanced  upon  the  right  leg  as 
long  as  possible.  Then  throw  out  the  left  leg  and 
shoulder  in  the  same  manner,  and  so  continue.  If 
you  begin  with  these  rules  well  in  your  head,  it  will 
save  you  much  painful  experimenting.  Having 
learned  to  make  progress  in  this  manner  with  firm- 
ness and  power,  you  will  have  learned  to  skate. 
Any  other  movement,  simple  or  complex,  belongs 
to  "  Fancy  Skating."  But,  first  of  all,  this  plain 
stroke  must  be  thoroughly  learned. 

The  "rolls"  forward  and  backward  are  the  basis 
of  all  fancy  skating.  The  forward  outside-edge  roll 
is  made  as  follows :  The  impetus  is  obtained  as  in 
plain  skating;  but,  as  the  stroke  is  made  with  the 
right  foot,  the  left  shoulder  is  brought  forward,  the 
right  arm  drawn  back,  and  with  the  face  looking  t® 
the  right,  the  whole  body  is  swung  easily  in  the 
direction  of  the  stroke ;  then  the  left  foot  is  lifted 
from  the  ice,  and,  being  brought  forward,  is  set 
down  a  few  inches  in  advance  of  the  right.  The 
same  movement  is  then  made  to  the  left,  the  right 
skate  having  now  its  inner  edge  to  the  ice  until 
ready  to  be  lifted.     The  Dutch  roll  is  performed  in 


0 


SKATING.  263 

this  same  manner,  save  that,  perhaps,  the  roll  is  not 
quite  so  broad,  the  movement  being  more  nearly  in 
a  straight  line.  The  marks  left  upon  the  ice  are 
something  as  in   the  fiofure. 

The  outer-edge  roll  leads  very  easily  to  the  cross 
roll,  each  foot  when  off  the  ice  being  swung,  in  the 
latter,  across  the  one  on  the  ice  and  starting  in  its 
stroke  from  the  crossed  position. 

Having  become  proficient  in  the  various  rolls  for- 
ward and  backward,  the  skater  is  now  prepared  to 


Fig.  1. 

attempt  for  himself  the  almost  infinite  number  of 
figures  and  movements  that  make  up  the  rest  of 
fancy  skating.  Most  of  these  will  require  long 
practice.  They  are,  too,  for  the  most  part,  almost 
impossible  to  be  described  upon  paper.  You  will 
have  to  pick  them  out  for  yourself,  getting  what 
helps  you  may  from  those  about  you  who  have  al- 
ready acquired  them. 

A  favorite  movement,  and  one  easily  mastered,  is 
that  which  used  to  be  familiarly  known  as  "Cutting 
the  Derby."     It  is  now  spoken  of  as  the  "  Left-over- 


264  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

Right,"  or  the  "  Right-over- Left,"  and  consists  in 
skating  in  a  circle  by  constantly  putting  the  outside 
foot  over  forward  and  inside  of  its  fel- 
low. A  few  steps  of  this  figure,  thrown 
in  now  and  then,  first  to  one  side  and 
then  to  the  other,  makes  a  very  grace- 
ful and  easy  variation  of  the  plain  for- 
'''■  '■  ward  roll. 

"Cutting  the  Crab"  is  another  simple  figure. 
While  going  forward,  one  foot  is  suddenly  thrown 
out,  turned  and  drawn  heel  foremost  directly  after 
the  other  ;  and  the  greater  part  of  a  circle  is  then 
described,  the  two  heels  being  brought  close  to- 
gether and  the  toes  turned 
straight  outward.  This 
is  a  neat  way  of  coming 
to  a  stop  if  one  has  plenty 
of  room. 

The  "  Figure  of  Three  " 
and  the  "  Figure  of  Eight " 
have  always  been  well 
known    to    skaters.      The 

Fig.  3. 

former  begins  at   exactly 

the  same  point  at  which  one  would  begin  in  writ- 
ing the  figure,  and  is  performed  on  one   foot,  the 


SKATING.  265 

first  part  on  the  outside  edge  forward,  and  the 
second  on  the  inside  edge  backward.  The  "  Figure 
of  Eight  "  is  a  combination  of  two  circles.  A  very 
pretty  "  Rosette"  is  made  by  combining  a  number 
of  "  Fiofure  of  Eiofhts,"  as  seen  in  the  figrure.  In 
this  "  Rosette,"  it  will  be  observed,  the  first  circle 
of  the  first  "  Eight"  is  gone  over  again  and  again, 
though  the  second  one  is  constantly  changed. 

Then,  there  are  all  the  other  Arabic  numerals  to 
be  made,  and  all  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  if  one 


Fig.  4. 

be  patient  and  skilful  enough.  And  there  is  the 
"Scissors,"  and  the  "Grapevine  Twist,"  and  the 
"  Virginia  Fence,"  which  leaves  a  mark  upon  the 
ice  that  describes  itself,  and  the  "  Locomotive," 
single  and  double,  so  called,  doubtless,  because  the 
sound  of  its  strokes  somewhat  resembles  the  puff- 
ings of  an  engine,  and  whose  track  is  something 
as  here  seen  ;  and  there  is  the  "  On  to  Richmond  " 
(cross  one  foot  in  front  of  the  other,  and  with 
back  stroke  outside  edge  go  backward  or  forward)  ; 
and  ever  so  many  others. 


266  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

You  should  see  a  programme  for  a  skating  con- 
test as  set  forth  by  the  American  Skating  Con- 
gress. I  can  assure  you  that  the  skaters  who  carry 
off  the  prizes  from   such  contests  must   indeed  be 

—  / — / — / / / 

Fig.  5. 

artists.  And  if  you  could  only  get  hold  of  one 
of  these  Prize  Skaters,  and  he  would  go  to  the 
pond  with  you,  he  could  teach  you  more  of  Fancy 
Skating  in  half  an  hour  upon  the  ice  than  I  could 
do  upon  paper  in  half  a  year. 


HAND-IN-HAND   SKATING. 

BY    W.    G.    VAN   T.    SUTPHEN. 
Front  Harpers^  Round  Table.    Copyright,  1895,  by  Harper  &  Brothers. 


T 


HERE  can  be  no  last- 
ing interest  in  any 
form  of  sport  unless  some 
definite  end  is  kept  in 
view,  some  problem  finally 
worked  out,  some  purpose 
accomplished.  There  is 
no  amusement  in  shoot- 
ing- arrows  aimlessly  into 
the  air,  or  in  carelessly  knocking  tennis-balls  over  a 
net.  The  archer  is  intent  on  seeing  how  often  he 
can  hit  the  gold ;  the  tennis-player  tries  to  put  that 
ball  over  in  such  a  way  that  his  opponent  cannot 
return  it.  The  score,  the  game  —  something  is  the 
object. 

Now,  skating  is  one  of  the  oldest  and  most  popu- 

267 


268  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

lar  of  winter  amusements,  and  yet  how  many  of  the 
thousands  of  boys  and  girls  who  anxiously  await 
the  hoisting  of  the  **  red  ball "  know  anything  more 
than  the  merest  beginnings  of  the  art?  The  vast 
majority  of  skaters  are  perfectly  satisfied  with  being 
able  to  progress  in  an  aimless,  desultory  fashion  up 
and  down  the  ice,  and  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the 
hockey-players.  And  I  may  add  that,  good  game 
though  it  is,  hockey  is  not  skating,  in  the  real  sense 
of  the  word  ;  and  it  can  never  help  you  to  anything 
better  than  the  ability  to  keep  your  feet  (and  your 
temper)  in  a  rough-and-tumble  scrimmage  after  a 
little  block  of  wood  or  a  rubber  "  puck."  And  yet 
there  is  something  better. 

Aside  from  speed-skating,  in  which  few  can  hope 
to  excel,  there  is  figure-skating,  as  it  is  popularly 
called.  It  is  generally  supposed  to  be  very  difficult, 
and  in  some  respects  it  is  so.  To  attempt  it  with- 
out the  assistance  of  a  teacher  requires  unlimited 
pluck  and  perseverance.  There  are  a  number  of 
books  on  the  subject,  illustrated  with  elaborate  dia- 
grams, and  everything  made  easy  in  theory.  But 
the  actual  thing  in  practice — that  is  very  different! 
It  is  like  "  French  at  Home,  in  Six  Easy  Lessons," 
or,  "The  Violin  without  a  Master."     The  hard  work 


HAND-IN-HAND    SKATING.  269 

does  pay  in  the  end,  if  persevered  in ;  but  the  begin- 
ner generally  gets  disgusted  after  the  first  few  fail- 
ures, and  goes  back  to  tag  and  hockey.  Perhaps 
that  has  been  your  experience  —  you  have  tried,  and 
found  it  of  no  use  ;  and  yet  you  do  envy  the  expert 
skater,  who  glides  past  you  on  the  "  back  cross-roll" 
so  easily  and  gracefully  that  you  are  certain  that  it 
must  feel  like  flying.  Well,  that  is  exactly  what  it 
does  feel  like,  and  I  am  going  to  suggest  a  plan  by 
which  you  may  secure  that  delightful  sensation  for 
yourself  at  the  expense  of  comparatively  little  time 
and  trouble.  After  you  have  once  known  the  fasci- 
nation that  there  is  in  true  figure-skating,  you 
will  probably  feel  encouraged  to  take  up  again 
the  explanations  and  diagrams  of  the  discarded 
text-books. 

Hand-in-hand  figures  are  among  the  prettiest 
things  that  can  be  done  upon  the  ice  from  the  spec- 
tators' point  of  view,  and  they  are  easiest  for  the 
performers.  You  have  the  assistance  of  your  partner 
at  every  critical  moment;  and  movements  such  as 
the  forward-rocking  turn,  which  require  weeks  of 
practice  to  do  alone,  can  be  executed  hand  in  hand 
with  comparative  ease.  In  individual  figure-skating 
you  are  obliged  to  advance  very  slowly  in  order  to 


270  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

preserve  correct  form  ;  in  hand- in-hand  skating  the 
"  form  "  is  of  less  importance,  or,  rather,  it  seems  to 
come  of  itself. 

Let  us  take  the  "  Mercury,"  or  3-scud  as  the 
English  call  it.  If  you  will  analyze  the  move- 
ments in  the  "  Forward  Mercury"  (Fig.  3),  you 
will  see  that  there  is  first  a  glide  on  the  left-foot 
outside  edge  backward  (L.O.B.),  then  a  glide 
forward  on  the  right-foot  outside  edge  (R.O.F.), 
and  finally  a  cross-roll  on  the  left-foot  outside 
edge  forward  (L.O.F.),  which  finishes  in  a  little 
backward  turn  on  the  same  foot,  leaving  you  in 
position  to  repeat  the  movement  with  the  right 
foot  on  the  outside  edge  backward  (R.O.B.). 
Examining  in  like  manner  the  detail  of  the 
"  Backward  Mercury"  (Fig.  4),  which  is  done  by 
your  partner  at  the  same  time  that  you  are  per- 
forming the  "  Forward,"  you  will  notice  that  it  is 
exactly  the  same,  except  that  there  are  two  back- 
ward glides  and  one  forward,  while  in  the  "  Forward  " 
there  are  hoo  forward  glides  and  one  backward. 

It  is  necessary,  then,  that  both  you  and  your 
partner  should  be  able  to  skate  the  outside  edge 
forward  and  back  and  rhake  the  little  curl-like  turn, 
and  also  that  one  of  you  should  be  reasonably  pro- 


HAND-IN-HAND   SKATING. 


271 


ficient  on  the  cross-roll  backward.  It  sounds  very 
difficult,  but  remember  that  I  am  not  asking  you  to 
attempt  all  this  alone  :  the  secret  lies  in  the  fact 
that  you  will  help  each  other. 


arcMPiotto. 


mt  CROSS  BY  IT. 


Fig  2 

Backward  Cross-Roll. 


The  outside  edge  forward  is  the  first  movement 
to  be  attempted.  Try  it  with  hands  joined  and 
crossed,  and  endeavor  to  make  the  stroke  toofether 
—  that  is,  in  the  same  time.  Lean  boldly  outward, 
and   make  the  curve  as  long  as  possible.     Try  it 


272  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

again,  but  this  time  hand  in  hand,  that  is,  with 
one  hand  free.  It  will  be  well  to  change  sides 
occasionally. 

Now  for  the  same  edge  in  a  backward  direction. 
To  put  the  first  question  in  the  catechism  to  a 
very  practical  use,  and  to  simplify  the  explanation, 
I  will  assume  that  you  are  M  and  that  your  partner 
is  N.  Join  hands  (not  crossed),  and  let  M  try 
the  outside  backward  on  alternate  feet,  while  N 
keeps  both  feet  on  the  ice  and  simply  squirms 
along  in  a  serpentine  line,  and  helps  M  to  preserve 
his  balance.  M  can  then  perform  the  same  kindly 
office  for  N. 

The  only  difference  between  the  outside  forward 
and  the  corresponding  cross  or  Dutch  roll  (Fig.  i) 
is  that  the  unemployed  foot,  instead  of  being  put 
down  alongside  of  the  employed,  is  swung  entirely 
over,  and  set  down  in  front  of  the  foot  on  which 
you  have  been  gliding,  and  which  is  then  imme- 
diately taken  up.  Join  hands  (not  crossed),  and 
let  N  skate  backward,  keeping  both  feet  firmly  on 
the  ice.  M  will  then  follow  on  the  outside  forward, 
remembering  to  cross  the  unemployed  foot  just  at 
the  end  of  the  glide.  After  the  unemployed  foot 
is  swung  over  and  put  down,  lift  the  other  quickly 


On  the  Ice. 
(From  the  painting:  h  J.  Scalbert.) 


HAND-IN-HAND    SKATING.  275 

and  let  it  swing  gently  out  over  the  ice,  and  then 
bring  it  in  ready  for  the  next  cross.  You  will 
soon  find  that  you  will  not  have  to  push  off  as 
you  did  on  the  ordinary  outside  edge ;  the  swing 
of  the  unemployed  leg  is  quite  sufficient  to  bring 
you  around. 

Now  for  N's  part,  the  backward  cross-roll  (Fig. 
2),  which  is  not  quite  so  easy.  As  before,  M 
will  keep  both  feet  on  the  ice,  so  as  to  give  his 
partner  a  firm  support.  Join  hands  (not  crossed), 
and  let  N  take  several  backward  steps  as  though 
he  (or  she)  were  walking,  but  crossing  his  feet 
alternately,  the  one  behind  the  other,  and  turning 
the  skate  so  that  the  outer  edge  is  the  one  placed 
on  the  ice.  After  seven  or  eight  steps,  press  the 
blade  firmly  into  the  ice  as  you  set  it  down  so  that 
you  can  feel  it  "  bite."  Now  give  the  unemployed 
leg  a  swing  as  you  take  it  up  ;  let  it  come  all  the 
way  around,  so  that  you  can  put  it  down  (on  the 
outside  edge)  well  crossed  behind  the  employed 
foot.  Lean  out  as  you  do  this,  and  let  the  skate 
that  is  on  the  ice  move  freely.  Your  partner  can 
help  you  immensely  if  he  will  lift  up  on  your 
hands,  and  at  the  same  time  gently  force  you  over 
in  the   proper   direction.     It   will   seem  impossible 


276 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


at  first ;  but  the  knack  will  come  all  in  a  flash,  and 
you  will  realize  that  it  is  the  twist  of  your  shoulders- 
and  the  swing-  of  the  unemployed  leg-  that  is  doing 
the  work.     It   is   very  necessary  to  get  these  for- 


filBN.    (3) 


F16.  3. 

The  Forward  Mercury. 


(1) 

Fig.  4. 

The  Backward  Mercury. 


ward  and  back  cross-rolls  as  perfect  as  possible 
before  attempting  the  "Mercury"  proper.  Unless 
you  can  do  them,  the  pace  quickly  gets  too  fast 
and  dangerous,  and  the  figure  is  spoiled. 

There    is  only  one  thing  more  before  we  begin 
to  put  our  material  together,  and  that  is  the  little 


HAND-IN-HAND    SKATING.  277 

turn  on  the  same  foot,  which  is  technically  called 
a  "  3."  This  particular  turn  is  very  easy,  and  is 
the  natural  one  that  everybody  uses.  Make  the  end 
or  tail  short,  and  practise  on  each  foot  forward 
and  back. 

As  soon  as  M  can  be  sure  of  his  forward 
cross-roll,  and  N  of  the  corresponding  backward 
movement,  we  can  try  the  whole  figure.  We  will 
suppose  that  M  has  learned  the  "  Forward,"  and 
N  the  "  Backward."  If  anything,  the  "  Backward" 
is  the  lady's  step,  as  her  partner  should  do  the 
steering.  Join  hands  (not  crossed)  and  stand 
facinof  each  other.  Endeavor  to  take  the  strokes 
together  in  exactly  the  same  time.  You  will  find 
it  of  advantage  to  count  one,  two,  three,  as  in 
learning  the  waltz.  For  instance,  in  the  "  Back- 
ward," begin  on  the  right  outside  forward,  and 
turn  a  "  3  "  (count  one),  drop  on  the  left  outside 
back  {two),  cross  the  right  foot  behind,  and  con- 
tinue on  the  right  cross-roll  backward  [three).  If, 
now,  you  are  looking  over  your  left  shoulder,  as 
you  should  on  a  right  outside  back,  you  will  be 
ready  for  the  left  outside  forward,  ending  with  a 
"  3  "  {o9ie),  the  drop  on  to  the  right  outside  back 
{two),    and    the    cross-roll    backward    on   the   left 


278  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

foot  {three).  The  counting-  is  the  same  for  M, 
who  does  the  "  Forward  ;  "  but  he  (or  she)  should 
be  particular  to  see  that  his  cross-roll  forward  (in 
which  he  makes  the  "  3  ")  is  done  in  exactly  the 
same  time  that  N  is  doing  the  cross-roll  back. 
The  steering  can  be  brought  to  as  high  a  degree 
of  perfection  as  in  a  ballroom.  A  variation  of  this 
figure,  called  the  "  Flying  Mercury,"  is  sometimes 
skated,  the  difference  being  that  the  skaters  do  not 
make  the  little  turn  or  "3,"  but  jump  from  one 
edge  to  another.  It  is  very  much  more  difficult, 
and  should  not  be  attempted  without  long  practice 
on  the  regular  figure.  After  you  have  become 
proficient  in  skating  the  "Mercury"  with  a  partner, 
you  can  do  the  two  movements  by  yourself.  The 
"Forward"  is  particularly  effective  when  done 
alone. 

There  are  many  other  hand-in-hand  figures, 
such  as  "  Double  Mohawks,"  "  Q  Scuds,"  and 
"  Rocking  Turns,"  which  look  well,  done  hand  in 
hand.  If  you  once  learn  the  "Mercury,"  and  get 
a  little  insight  into  the  fascinating  mystery  of 
figure-skating,  you  will  be  anxious  to  look  them 
up  in  the  books,  or  seek  the  assistance  of  some 
friendly  expert. 


HAND-IN-HAND    SKATING.  279 

If  you  have  a  file  or  the  bound  volume  oi  Harper  s 
Young  People  for  1892,  look  up  the  article  on 
figure-skating,  under  date  of  March  8.  It  con- 
tains some  valuable  hints  on  skate-fastenings  and 
foot-gear.  Above  all,  don't  use  straps,  or  you  will 
never  be  able  to  skate  with  confidence  and  free- 
dom. It  is  not  strength,  but  suppleness  of  ankle, 
that  is  required;  and  any  ankle  that  is  strong 
enough  to  walk  on  without  turning  is  strong 
enough  to  skate  with.  Straps  cramp  the  muscles 
and  stop  the  circulation.  Use  heel-plates  and  a 
key-fastening  at  the  sole,  unless  you  can  set  aside 
a  pair  of  shoes  for  skating  only ;  in  this  case  the 
foot-stock  should  be  permanently  attached  to  the 
boot  by  ordinary  screws. 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,   AND   SPLICES. 

BY    CHARLES    R.    TALBOT. 

ON  land  or  on  water  every  boy  should  know 
how  to  knot  a  rope,  splice  two  pieces  of 
rope  together,  or  make  the  sort  of  hitch  which  will 
best  serve  his  purpose. 

The  first  thing-  to  be  sure  of  is  the  right  way  to 
fasten  together  two  pieces  of  string  or  rope.  That 
is  a  thing  that  some  of  us  have  to  do  twenty  times 
a  day;  and  it  is  quite  probable  that  twenty  times  a 
day  we  do  it  wrong.  Suppose  that  you  wish  to 
lengthen  your  fish-line,  or  add  another  ball  to  a 
kite-string :  how  will  you  do  it  ?  Shall  you  lay 
the  two  ends  side  by  side,  and  then  twist  them  to 
gether  into  a  knot,  just  as  your  sister  would  make 
one  in  the  end  of  her  thread  ? 

If  you  do,  you  may  fairly  expect  that  your  fish 
will  get  away  with  the  main  part  of  your  line,  or 
that    presently  your   kite  will  go  skurrying    off   far 

280 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,     AND     SPLICES. 


281 


out  of  your  sight.  Such  a  knot  is  at  least  as  likely 
to  slip  as  to  hold,  and,  if  tied  in  a  rope,  is  liable 
sooner  or  later  to  cut  the  rope,  because  the  strain 
is  at  right  angles.  What  is  really  wanted  is  a 
Square-knot  (Fig.   3,  a). 

Take  the  two  ends,  and  tie  them  together  exactly 
as  you  would  tie  a  "  hard-knot"  in  your  shoe-string. 


A  Square  or  Reef-Knot. 
Fig.  3. 


A  Granny. 


Fig.  4.    A  Becket-Hitch. 


Only  you  must  be  careful  and  not  tie  a  Granny 
(Fig.  3,  b).     One  may  slip  ;  the  other  won't. 

Fig.  4  is  a  Becket-hitch,  the  proper  knot  for 
joining  a  large  and  a  smaller  rope.  It  will  be 
useful,  for  example,  when  the  keleg-line  of  your 
boat  is  too  short,  and  the  only  line  at  hand  to 
bend  on  to  it  is  a  stout  piece  of  hemp  twine. 

A  loop  at  the  end  of  a  rope  —  that  is,  a  loop 
that  will   not  draw   up  —  is  another  knot  that  has 


2«2 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


frequently  to  be  made.  And  yet  few  people 
know  how  to  make  it.  What  is  wanted  in  such 
a  case  is  a   Bowline. 

Make  a  bight  near  the  end  of  your  rope,  as  in 
the  first  cut  of  Fig.  5.  Seize  this  with  the  left 
hand  at  a,  and  then  with  the  right  hand  pass  the 
end  b  up  through  the  bight,  around  behind  the 
main  part  of  the  rope  at  c,  and  down  in  front  of 


Fig.  5.     The  Bowline. 


Fig.  6. 


Fig.  7. 


it  through  the  bight  again  as  in  ^f.  Draw  this 
tight  and  you  have  the  much-talked-of  Bowline. 
It  is  a  very  simple  matter,  as  you  see. 

While  speaking  still  of  the  ends  of  ropes,  let  us 
stop  and  learn  to  "  fasten  them  off"  properly  to 
prevent  their  untwisting  or  fraying  out.  The 
painter  or  main-sheet  of  your  boat  may  need  such 
treatment.  The  simplest  method  is  to  "serve"  or 
wind  the  end  with  small  twine.  A  Single-wall 
(Fig.  6),  or  a  Double-wall  (Fig.  7),  is  better.     But 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,    AND    SPLICES. 


283 


better  still  is  the  Boatswain's-whipping,  formed  by 
making  an  inverted  single-wall  and  then  splicing  the 
ends  back  over  the  rope  itself  (Fig.  8  and  Fig.  9). 


Fig.  8.  Ftg.9. 

The    most   elegant  of  all  such,  however,  is   the 
Stopper-knot,  seen  in  the  four  figures  below. 
Place   the  end  a  as  in  Fig.   10,  holding  it  with 


The  Four  Steps  of  The  Stopper-Knot. 

I  c 


<225q 


Fig.  10. 


Fig.  11. 


Fig.  12. 


Fig.  13. 


the  thumb  at  ci;  pass  d  around  under  it,  c  around 
under  d  and  through  the  bight  o( a,  and  pull  tight; 
this  forms  a  Single-wall  (Fig.  11).     Now  lay  a  over 


284  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

d,  b  over  e,  c  over  b  and  through  the  bight  of  a,  and 
draw  tight  (Fig.  12). 

Next  pass  b  down  around  /and  up  through  the 
bight  g,  and    do  the   same  with  a  and  c,  forming 

Fig-    13- 

Finally  pass  each  strand  by  the  side  of  the  strands 

in  the  crown  down  through  the  walling  to  form  the 

"  double-crown,"  and  cut  close  the  ends  a,  b  (and  c), 

and  you  have  produced  the  Stopper-knot. 


Fig.  15. 

A  Sheepshank  before  it  is  drawn  Tight.         Fig.  16.     The  True-Lover's  Knot. 

A  Sheepshank  (Fig.  15)  is  a  knot  by  which  a 
rope  may  be  made  shorter,  or  (as  a  young  yacht- 
woman  of  my  acquaintance  recently  expressed  it) 
"a  tuck  taken  in  it."  If  the  tide  has  come  in  and 
you  wish  to  shorten  the  mooring-line  of  your  boat, 
the  Sheepshank  will  gather  up  the  slack  for  you  and 
hold  it  firmly. 

When  one  wants  to  make  an  artificial  handle  for 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,    AND    SPLICES. 


285 


an  old  jug  or  some  other  vessel,  the  True- Lover's 
knot  is  used,  as  seen  in  Fig.  16. 

Tie  two  loose  knots^  a,  b,  as  in  the  first  cut  of 


Fig.  17. 


Fig.  1 7 ;  pass  the  bight  a  through  the  opening  f, 
the  bight  b  through  g,  pull  the  loops  equal,  and, 
to  complete  the  knot  as  in  second  cut  of  Fig.  17, 
join  the  ends  c,  d,  by  a  long  splice  at  e. 


Fig.  18.  Fig.  19.  Fig.  20. 

The  Jar-sling,  seen  in  Fig.  20,  serves  a  similar 
purpose.  In  a  long  piece  of  cord,  make  a  large 
loop  as  in  Fig.   18,  and  hold  the  bight  against  the 


286 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


Standing  parts,  a,  a ;  pass  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  the  other  hand  down  through  c,  lay  hold  of  b 
where  the  crook  of  the  imaginary  wire  is  seen,  and 
draw  it  through  c  down  a  little  below  a,  a,  as  in 
Fig.  19,  d,  and  hold  it  there.  Now  pass  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  down  through  the  opening  e  (in  the 
way  the  wire  goes),  lay  hold  of  g,  and  draw  it  up 
through  e,  forming  the  complete  knot  as  in  Fig.  20. 


Fig.  21. 


Fig.  22. 
The  Turh's-head  Knot. 


Fig.  23. 


One  more  knot,  the  Turk's-head  (Fig.  23), 
remains  to  be  described  before  we  pass  to  the 
briefer  subject  of  hitches.  Take  a  long  piece  of 
fishing-cord,  place  the  end  a  against  the  forefinger, 
wind  the  cord  around  the  two  fingers  and  hold  it 
with  the  thumb,  as  in  Fig.  21. 

Now  with  the  other  hand  lay  the  part  d  over  the 
part  c,  and  while  in  that  position  pass  the  end  a 
down  between  them,  over  the  first  crossing,  under 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,    AND    SPLICES. 


289 


left  strand,  up  between,  over  second  crossing,  under 
right  strand,  up  between ;  take  the  hitch  off  your 
fingers,  and  it  will  be  as  in  Fig.  22. 

Next  pass  the  loose  end  through  the  opening 
d,  laying  it  against  the  cord  a ;  then,  with  it,  follow 
that  strand  (a)  over  and  under,  over  and  under, 
until  you  have  a  complete  plait  of  three  cords. 
Pass  the  knot  over  a  stick  to  make  it  taut,  and 
cut  the  ends  close. 


F\q.  24. 
Two  Ways  of  Fastening  a  Weight  to  a  Line. 


Fig.  25. 
To    Tie   a  Short  Une,   to 
which    a    Hook    is    At- 
tached,   to  a  linger  or 
Ground  Une. 


The  Turk's-head  knot,  like  the  two  preceding  it, 
will  tax  your  precision,  deftness,  and  patience,  and 
is  an  ornamental  rather  than  a  useful  knot. 

The  knots  in  Figs.  24,  25,  and  26  explain  them- 
selves; they  a'-e  often  useful  to  picknickers  and 
campers-out. 

Hitches  are  no  less  ktiots  than  any  of  the  fore- 
going ;  but  they  are  knots  used  to  fasten  the  end  of 


2  go 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


a  rope  to  any  object  in  such  manner  as  to  be  easily 
cast  off  when  no  longer  needed.  They  are  few  in 
number,  and  all  very  simple  and  easily  described. 

A  Blackwall  hitch  is  merely  a  loop  thrown  about 
a  hook,  as  in  Fig.  27,  in  such  a  way  that  the  main 
part  of  the  rope,  c,  being  pulled  downward,  the  part 
a  jams  the  part  b  against  the  hook  so  firmly  that 
while  the  strain  is  kept  up  the  knot  cannot  possibly 


Fig.  28.  Fig.  27. 

To  Fasten  a  Line    Blackwall  Hitch, 
to  a  Fish-Hook. 


Fig.  29. 


Fig.  30. 
The  Clove  Hitch. 


slip.     Sailors  use  this  hitch  very  frequently ;  but  it 
can  be  used  on  land  as  well  as  at  sea. 

Of  all  hitches,  however,  the  one  which  any  man 
or  boy  can  least  afford  not  to  know  is  the  Clove 
hitch.  Make  two  bights  or  loops,  as  in  Fig.  29; 
hold  them  between  the  thumbs  and  forefingers  at 
a,  b;  slide  the  left  loop  over  the  right  loop ;  then 
slip  the  double  loop  thus  formed  over  the  table-leg, 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,    AND    SPLICES. 


291 


or  anything  that  will  represent  a  post,  and  draw 
tight  by  the  end  (Fig.  30).  Practise  this  until  your 
fingers  can  do  it  swiftly  and  of  themselves,  just  as 
your  tongue  can  say  the  alphabet ;  for  a  Clove  hitch, 
when  it  is  used,  needs  to  be  made  quickly  and  hand- 
somely. I  once  saw  a  young  cadet  from  Annapolis, 
who  had  been  out  on  a  sailing-party  with  some 
ladies,  and  had  jumped  ashore  with  a  rope,  hesitate 


Fig.  31. 
Floating  Spar. 


A  Rolling  Hitch.  A  Cat's-Paw. 

Fig.  32. 


at  least  half  a  minute  before  he  could  think  how  to 
make  the  proper  knot,  while  a  number  of  old  sea- 
captains  sitting  by  were  watching  him  and  laughing 
among  themselves.  A  Clove  hitch  may  be  used, 
too,  when,  while  out  fishing,  you  extemporize  an 
anchor  by  tying  a  rope  to  a  stone.  And  in  Fig.  3 1 
you  see  again  how  this  knot,  e  (with  a  half-hitch,/", 
in  front  of  it) ,  is  used  to  tow  a  floating  spar,  or  drag 
a  piece  of  timber  across  the  field. 


292  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 

Two  Other  hitches,  a  Rolling  hitch  and  a  Cat's- 
paw,  are  shown  in  Fig.  32. 

Splicing  is  a  process  by  which  ropes  are  joined 
together  so  as  to  leave  no  knot.  I  appreciated  its 
importance  one  morning  when  I  saw  an  intelli- 
gent man  of  fifty  work  for  an  hour  to  splice  a  ham- 
mock rope.  Where  it  is  not  specially  important 
that  the  joining  be  a  very  nice  and  smooth  one, 
the  "short"  splice  is  used.  It  is  made  by  passing 
the  strands  of  one  piece  in  and  out  between  those 
of  the  other.  The  short  splice  always  leaves  the 
spliced  part  thicker  and  clumsier  than  the  rest  of 
the  rope.  If  it  is  desirable  that  the  joining  be  a 
very  neat  one,  so  as  to  admit  of  the  rope's  running 
readily  through  the  sheave-hole  of  a  block,  the 
"long"  splice  is  necessary.  This  is  made  by  un- 
winding each  end  about  two  inches,  placing  the 
strands  as  in  the  short  splice,  then  unwinding  one 
strand  farther  back,  and  winding  the  corresponding 
strand  of  the  other  piece  in  its  place ;  proceeding  in 
the  same  way  with  the  other  strands,  and  then  fast- 
ening the  ends  in  such  a  way  that  it  is  almost  im- 
possible to  detect  the  splice.  We  have  not  space 
to  describe  here  the  exact  mode  of  procedure  ;  but 
there  is  scarcely  a  town  or  village  anywhere  but  has 


KNOTS,    HITCHES,    AND    SPLICES. 


293 


its  "  old  sailor,"  and  there  is  no  old  sailor  anywhere 
but  will  be  glad  to  come  and  give  you  a  lesson 
in  splicing. 

A  splice  that  you  can  very  easily  learn  for  your- 
selves, however,  is  the  Eye-splice.  First  make 
yourself  a  marling-spike,  —  if  you  have  not  the  gen- 
uine article,  —  by  whittling  down  to  a  point  a  piece 


Fig.  34. 


of  hard  wood.  I  have  found  that  the  half  of  a 
clothes-pin,  so  treated,  answered  the  purpose  ex- 
ceedingly well.  Then  take  a  piece  of  good  three- 
strand  rope,  unwind  the  strands,  and  place  them  as 
you  see,  a,  d,  c,  in  Fig.  33.  Open  the  strand  d,  and 
pass  a  through  it,  as  in  Fig.  34 ;  then  open  e,  and 
pass  d  over  d  and  under  e,  as  in  Fig.  35.  Turn  the 
eye  over.  Fig.  36,  open  /  and  pass  c  through  it,  as 
in  Fig.  37,  and  pull  the  strands  tight.     Now  pass  a 


294 


THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS. 


over  the  strand  next  it,  under  the  next  one,  and  so 
on  with  the  others.  Proceed  in  the  same  way  until 
the  spHce  is  about  an  inch  long.  Then  stretch  the 
eye  (holding  by  the  rope),  to  tighten  everything, 
and  cut  the  ends  close.      If  you  will   make   a   neat 


Fig.  35. 


Fig.  36. 


Fig.  37. 


Eye-splice  all  by  yourself,  and  take  it  to  the  old 
sailor  aforementioned,  he  will  be  sure  to  think  it 
worth  while  to  teach  you  all  he  knows ;  and  he  will 
be  likely  to  tell  you  many  things  about  knots, 
hitches,  and  splices  which  are  of  necessity  omitted 
here. 


SUMMER   SPORTS. 

BY   THE    EDITOR. 

SUMMER  at  last.  Bright  summer,  glad  summer, 
delightful  summer,  jolly  summer,  as  different 
poets  have  called  it.  The  sun  lies  warm  on  the 
open  uplands,  the  breeze  blows  soft  across  the 
grassy  valleys,  the  shady  spots  upon  the  edges  of 
the  rustling  wood  look  cool  and  inviting;  and  so, 
out  of  the  sun  and  into  the  shadow  let  us  pass, 
accepting  the  invitation  of  still  another  famous 
poet  — 

"Under  the  greenwood  tree, 

Who  loves  to  lie  with  me 

And  tune  his  merry  note 

Unto  the  sweet  bird's  throat. 
Come  hither,  come  hither,  come  "  — 

But  what !  cry  all  our  would-be  athletes  in  chorus ; 
loll  under  the  trees  like  cows  and  other  cattle  for 
sheer  laziness  and  cud-chewing  ?  No,  sir,  not  we. 
Summer  means  fun,  and  not  loafing.     It  means  the 

295 


296  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

open  air  and  the  blue  sky ;  it  means  the  freedom 
of  street  and  park  and  meadow  and  seashore,  and 
all  the  big  playground  that  Mrs.  Nature  has  laid 
out  fof  the  young  people  who  seek  her.  So,  sir, 
under  no  trees  and  into  no  shadows  do  we  go 
while  there  are  enough  of  us  stirring  to  get  up 
some  jolly,  good  game,  or  take  sides  in  some 
particularly  favorite   fun. 

I  suppose  there  never  was  a  nation,  race,  or  peo- 
ple since  first  the  earth  was  made,  that  did  not 
have  girls  and  boys  who  not  only  loved  play,  but 
did  play,  and  with  a  will.  The  Eskimos  of  the 
frozen  North,  the  Tupinambras  of  the  Brazilian 
pampas,  the  gami7is  of  the  Paris  streets,  the  boys 
and  girls  of  London  and  Boston  and  New  York, 
have  in  their  nature  one  kindred  tie,  —  the  love  of 
sport. 

But  if  there  is  any  boy  or  girl  who  thinks  that 
he  or  she  has  ever  conceived,  planned,  or  played 
a  new  game,  let  such  consider  well  before  claiming 
the  right  of  invention. 

There  is  nothing  new  under  the  sun,  said  the 
wise  man  ;  and  especially  is  there  nothing  new  in 
young  folks'  games.  Archaeologists  find  well-be- 
loved  dolls    in    Egyptian    pyramids    and    on    pre- 


A  Vhaiiungti. 


SUMMER    SPORTS.  299 

historic  tombs ;  the  name  of  a  popular  ball-club 
was  found  scrawled  upon  the  outer  walls  of  Pom- 
peiian  houses;  and  one  of  the  most  exciting  base- 
ball matches  on  record  was  the  one,  stubbornly 
fought,  between  the  rival  nines  of  Montezuma, 
King  of  Mexico,  and  Nezahualpilli,  'tzin  of  Tezcuco. 
The  boys  of  ancient  Greece  and  Rome  played  at 
whip-top  and  quoits,  and  base-ball  and  pitch-penny, 
and  blind-man's-buff  and  hide-and-seek,  and  jack- 
stones  and  follow  my  leader,  just  as  do  the  boys  of 
to-day ;  the  girls  were  experts  at  see-saw,  and 
swinging  and  dancing,  and  grace-hoops  and  dice- 
throwing  and  ball-play,  and,  in  Sparta,  even  at 
running,  wrestling,  and  leaping.  Tobogganing  is 
as  old  as  ice  and  snow  ;  and  when  you  play  at 
cherry-pits  you  are  only  doing  what  Nero  and 
Commodus  and  young  Themistocles  did  ages  ago 
in  Rome  and  Athens. 

So,  whatever  the  age  or  clime,  the  boys  and  girls 
of  the  world  have  always  lived  more  for  play  than 
anything  else ;  and  however  harsh  or  hard  their  sur- 
roundings, however  stern  or  strict  their  fathers  and 
mothers,  they  always  found  and  made  the  most  of 
the  time  for  play,  and,  more  than  any  other  season, 
the  time  for  summer  sports. 


300  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

These  sports  to-day  are  fast  reducing  themselves 
into  as  many  sciences,  over-weighted  with  rules  and 
restrictions,  that  often  take  the  real  play  element 
from  them,  and  make  them  as  unyielding  and  sedate 
as  a  problem  in  algebra. 

Now,  while  rules  and  restrictions  are  undoubtedly 
necessary,  there  is  such  a  thing  as  going  too  far; 
and  I  am  inclined  to  believe  that  the  boys  and  girls 
prefer  to  follow  the  cast-iron  rules  only  to  the  verge 
of  **  cast-ironness,"  and  make  their  sport,  if  less 
absolute,  at  least  more  jolly.  There  is  no  fun  in 
making  our  sport  a  matter  of  life  and  death. 

I  know  grown  people  who,  in  these  days  of  prize- 
giving  in  all  manner  of  games,  centre  their  whole 
desires,  not  on  the  fun  of  the  game,  but  on  the 
prizes  offered.  They  really  seem  as  disappointed 
if  they  do  not  carry  off  a  trophy  as  if  they  had 
met  with  some  serious  loss.  Let  us  take  our  fun 
with  jollity  or  not  at  all.  Interest  is  one  thing,  and 
irritability  is  quite  another. 

So,  whatever  the  game  you  are  playing,  re- 
member that  the  best  of  all  rules  is :  Keep  your 
temper.  Life  has  plenty  of  shifting  clouds  with- 
out the  necessity  of  quarrels  over  games ;  disputes 
and   bickerings    have    far   too   often   broken    up    a 


'  Tobogganing  is  as  Old  as  Ice  and  Snow. " 


SUMMER    SPORTS.  303 

merry  company,  and  spoiled  the  beauty  of  a  sum- 
mer play-day. 

Now,  while  I  fully  realize  that  no  new  games 
are  likely  to  supplant  foot-ball,  base-ball,  or  tennis 
in  the  favor  of  Young  America,  I  do  feel  sure  that 
there  is  left  plenty  of  room  for  some  such  games 
as  may  be  played  by  any  number  of  young  people, 
—  boys  or  girls,  —  and  without  the  necessity  of 
having  carefully  prepared  grounds.  Croquet  for- 
merly filled  this  want ;  and  golf,  called  by  one  en- 
thusiast "  a  sort  of  glorified  croquet,"  is  at  present 
attracting  a  good  deal  of  attention.  But  croquet 
has  fallen  more  or  less  into  disfavor,  and  golf  can 
be  played  only  in  the  open  country.  For  this 
reason  I  am  going  to  say  jugt  a  word  about  one 
or  two  games  which  may  be  played  almost  any- 
where by  any  number  of  people. 

And  in  the  first  of  these  —  the  good  old  English 
game  of  bowls  —  the  croquet  balls  which  have  been 
unused  for  several  years  may  be  made  to  do  service. 

The  "bowls"  used  in  the  scientific  game  are 
peculiarly  constructed,  but  for  unprofessional  sport 
the  croquet  balls  will  serve  the  purpose.  The 
rules  here  given  are  for  this  unprofessional  game, 
and    are    those    pronounced   by  a   very  recent   au- 


SUMMER    SPORTS.  305 

thority  on  this  attractive  sport.  Retain  the  sides 
chosen  for  your  last  game  of  croquet,  and  let  the  cap- 
tains choose  for  "  first."  The  oround  is  marked  off 
by  a  line  at  one  end,  and  a  small  quoit  is  placed 
in  the  centre  of  a  ring-  at  the  other.  The  game 
is  commenced  by  the  first  player  of  the  side  win- 
ning the  toss ;  he  endeavors  to  roll  his  ball  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  quoit,  or  tee  as  it  is  called. 
The  first  player  on  the  other  side  then  strives  to 
roll  his  ball  either  closer  to  the  tee  than  is  that  of 
his  adversary,  or,  if  that  is  not  possible,  to  drive 
his  opponent's  ball  away.  If  he  fails  to  do  either, 
then  the  second  player  of  the  leading  side  rolls  his 
ball  so  as  to  guard  the  first  player's  ball  from  at- 
tack ;  and  so  the  game  proceeds  until  all  the  balls 
have  been  rolled  to  the  tee,  when  the  side  whose 
ball  or  balls  are  nearest  to  the  tee  scores  an  ace  for 
each  ball  counting.  Only  the  side  to  whom  be- 
longs the  ball  nearest  the  tee  can  count ;  so,  if  the 
second  nearest  ball  is  an  opponent's,  the  winning 
side  can  only  count  one.  The  winner  of  the  game 
is  the  side  which  first  scores  twenty-one.  Should 
a  ball  settle  in  the  centre  of  the  tee  quoit,  then 
the  count  is  four,  unless  the  ball  be  knocked  off 
the  quoit,  either  by  an  opponent's  ball,  or  by  a  ball 


306  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS, 

of  the  side  which  rolled  it  on  the  tee.  These  are 
the  rules  for  a  bowling-  court  or  field  with  one  end. 
If  two  ends  are  laid  out,  two  tees  or  quoits  are  set 
one  at  either  end,  and  the  contestants  roll  from  each 
end  alternately. 

One  of  the  most  fascinatino-  in  the  whole  list  of 
summer  sports  is  canoeing.  There  is,  indeed,  no 
reason  why  a  boy  who  can  swim  should  not  paddle 
his  own  canoe  without  assistance  or  watching. 
Mr.  John  Habberton  tells  a  story  of  offering  a 
watch  and  chain  to  one  of  his  boys  if  he  could 
prove  himself  able  to  upset  a  canoe  while  sitting 
in  the  bottom.  Mr.  Habberton  declares  that  he 
saved  both  the  watch  and  the  boy ;  for  the  canoe 
could  not  be  tipped  over. 

Canoe-racing  has  perhaps  injured  quite  as  much 
as  it  has  benefited  the  sport  of  canoe-cruising. 
The  racers  have  devised  improvements  in  model 
and  in  riof,  of  which  the  canoeists  who  do  not  race 
have  taken  advantage ;  but  they  have  contrived  by 
their  recklessness  in  carrying  too  much  sail,  and  by 
the  upsets  which  naturally  follow,  to  foster  a  public 
impression  that  the  canoe  is  a  cranky  craft.  This, 
as  may  be  learned  from  Mr.  Habberton's  experience, 
is  not  the  case. 


SUMMER    SPORTS. 


307 


The  regulation  canoe  is  decked  over,  except 
where  the  small  well-hole  appears  in  the  centre. 
Waves  of  ordinary  size,  therefore,  cannot  break 
over  the  coverings. 

The   limited   crew  of  a  canoe  should   always  sit 


The  Canoeist's  Landing. 


upon  the  bottom  of  the  craft.  The  canoe,  if  thus 
handled,  will  be  found  remarkably  free  from  rolling, 
and,  being  furnished  with  air-tight  compartments, 
nearly  as  safe  as  an  ordinary  row-boat. 

It  is  difficult  to  fill  or  swamp  a  well-built  and 
properly  managed  canoe,  and  it  is  impossible  to 
sink  her  when  full.     She  will  outride  any  form  of 


308  THE    HOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

row-boat,  and  will  live  through  a  storm  in  which  a 
small  steam-launch  will  go  down. 

The  cost  of  a  canoeist's  outfit  varies  all  the  way 
from  ten  to  four  hundred  dollars ;  but  just  as  much 
fun  and  exercise  can  be  had  with  a  home-made  affair 
or  a  cheap  canoe  as  with  the  most  elegant  boat  in 
the  market,  rich  in  polished  mahogany  and  Spanish 
cedar,  and  glittering  with  silver-plating. 

Girls,  as  well  as  boys,  make  expert  canoeists ;  and 
the  sport  is  healthful,  safe,  and  altogether  delightful. 

As  a  capital  game  of  strength  and  skill,  played  at 
many  a  jolly  picnic  and  on  many  a  shady  stretch  of 
lawn  or  level  ground,  the  game  of  Quoits  has  for 
generations  proved  a  source  of  interest,  enjoyment, 
and  friendly  rivalry. 

Quoits  is  but  a  modern  adaptation  of  the  old 
Grecian  p-ame  of  Throwing;  the  Discus. 

There  is,  however,  this  difference:  the  discus  was 
a  much  heavier  ring  than  is  the  modern  quoit ;  and 
the  object  of  the  old  Greek  game  was  to  determine 
which  discobolus  had  the  stronger  arm,  and  could 
throw  his  discus  farthest.  In  Quoits  the  object  is 
to  place  the  quoit  nearest  a  certain  fixed  point. 

The  iron  rings  are  thrown  at  the  pin,  or  "  hob," 
placed  from  forty  to  sixty  feet  away.     The  object  is 


7/;.-  Q-ii>!t    I hroiver. 
{Copy  of  tlie  Marble  of  the  Discobolus  of  the  VaiUau.) 


SUMMER    SPORTS.  3  I  I 

to  ring  the  hob, —  a  task  rarely  accompHshed,  —  or 
to  get  as  near  to  the  hob  as  possible. 

Players  may  throw  alternately,  or  sides  may  be 
chosen.  Each  player  throws  all  his  quoits ;  and 
when  all  have  been  cast  an  investigation  is  made. 
If  A  (supposing  him  to  have  thrown  three  quoits) 
has  placed  his  three  nearer  the  hob  than  has  B,  he 
counts  three  toward  the  total  score.  If  one  of  his 
is  nearest  the  hob,  and  B  owns  the  next  nearest, 
then  A  can  count  but  one,  no  matter  how  closely 
to  the  hob  his  other  quoits  may  lie.  The  same  rule 
holds  good  in  playing  sides. 

When  the  count  has  been  determined,  the  players 
stand  at  the  hob  first  played  at,  and  throw  their 
quoits  at  a  hob  driven  in  at  the  starting-point. 
This  alternate  playing  is  continued  until  the  full 
score  has  been  made  by  one  side  or  player.  The 
total  score  is  twenty-one.  If  a  quoit  rings  the 
hob,  —  that  is,  completely  encircles  it,  —  the  success- 
ful pitcher  counts  ten. 

The  "science"  in  Quoits  consists  in  careful 
throwing.  Hold  the  flat  side  of  the  quoit  down- 
ward, with  the  forefinger  resting  in  the  notch  and 
the  thumb  on  the  upper  side.  Give  the  quoit  a 
spinning  motion  with  the  forefinger,  so  that  it  will 


312  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

fall  with  its  edge  downward,  cutting  its  way  into  the 
ground,  with  its  flat  side  toward  the  thrower.  The 
quoit  may  be  best  aimed  by  sighting  the  hob 
through  the  hole  in  the  centre.  Don't  throw  the 
quoit  so  that  it  will  "wobble,"  and  not  stick  in  the 
ground,  or  so  that  its  flat-  side  is  up.  This  last  is 
sometimes  counted  as  a  dead  quoit,  and  has  no 
claim  in  the  score. 

The  throwers  may  grow  tired  before  the  game 
is  over;  but  it  is  a  "healthy  tired"  if  the  distances 
are  not  too  great,  and  the  sport  is  one  fitted 
to  strengthen  the  muscles  and  train  the  eyes  of 
strong-limbed  boys  and  girls. 

An  exciting,  though  sometimes  a  rather  rough 
game  for  the  boys  to  play  is  "Ball  in  the  Hole,"  or 
"Nine  Holes"  as  it  is  sometimes  called.  The  sim- 
ple description  taken  from  the  "American  Boys' 
Book  of  Sports  "  fully  describes  a  game  that  is  as 
popular  among  the  street-boys  of  New  York  as 
among  the  boys  who  have  plenty  of  space  and 
elbow-room   in   the  open  and  breezy  country. 

"Dig  near  a  wall,"^'  says  the  "  Boys'  Book,"  "nine 
holes  of  about  six  inches  in  diameter  and  three 
deep.  Let  each  player  have  one  of  these,  accord- 
ing to  his  number,  which  must  be  determined  by 


SUMMER    SPORTS.  313 

lot.  At  about  six  yards  from  the  holes  draw  a  line ; 
and  from  this,  as  a  fielding-place,  one  player  pitches 
the  ball  into  one  of  the  holes. 

"  The  boy  to  whom  this  hole,  is  assigned  imme- 
diately runs  to  it,  while  all  the  players  run  off  in 
different  directions. 

"  The  player  snatches  the  ball  from  the  hole,  and 
throws  it  at  one  of  the  runners.  If  he  hits  him,  the 
boy  thus  struck  becomes  the  pitcher,  and  the  one 
that  struck  him  counts  one.  Should  he  not  hit  him, 
the  player  who  throws  the  ball  loses  a  point,  and 
bowls. 

"  The  player  who  misses  his  aim  at  throwing  the 
ball  at  his  partners  a  second  time,  becomes  a 
'tenner.'  If  he  loses  the  third  hit,  he  is  a  '  fif- 
teener ; '  if  the  fourth,  he  stands  out  and  can  play 
no  more." 

When  all  the  players  are  thus  out,  the  last  player 
remaining  in  wins  the  game ;  and  he  can  compel 
each  of  the  losers  to  stand  against  the  wall  and  be 
"  peppered  "  by  the  successful  player  with  the  ball 
used  in  the  game.  This  "  peppering"  should,  how- 
ever, be  done  mildly,  if  at  all ;  for  a  victor  should 
always  remember  to  be  moderate  in  his  hour  of 
victory. 


314  THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 

Moderation  is  good  in  all  things  —  in  summer 
sports  as  well  as  in  winter  work.  But  competition 
is  also  healthy ;  and  if  there  be  thus  a  genuine, 
whole-souled  atternpt,  on  the  part  of  all  the  boys 
who  admire  physical  strength  and  prowess,  to 
allow  only  the  good  and  ennobling  influences  in 
their  play  to  work  upon  their  characters,  then  I 
am  sure  that  they  will  be  "backed  up"  and  en- 
couraged by  their  elders  in  all  the  enthusiasm  they 
show  in  that  direction. 

Athletics,  in  one  form  or  another,  are  nearly  as 
old  as  history  itself ;  and  the  present  attempt, 
under  the  encouragement  of  several  college  pro- 
fessors, to  revive  the  Olympic  games  in  Greece, 
indicates  that  students  of  history  realize  there  is 
something  more  to  be  gained  by  such  a  gathering 
than  the  mere  settling  of  a  disputed  champion- 
ship. It  rests,  however,  with  the  youth  who  en- 
gage actively  in  the  contests  to  show  what  they 
are  capable  of  doing  in  the  strengthening  of  both 
body  and  character. 


INDEX. 


"Athlete,"  the  word,  il. 

Athletics,  the  lessons  of,  13;  phys- 
ical benefits  of,  14;  evils  of, 
16. 

Ball  in  the  Hole,  312. 

Base -Ball:  too  professional,  33; 
planning  for  season's  work,  34; 
training-time,  34;  muscle  devel- 
oping, 34;  practice  work,  35; 
base  sliding,  36;  coaching,  37; 
selecting  the  pitchers,  37;  the 
c!»ge>  37;  batting,  37;  Easter 
trip,  38;  table  diet,  39;  base 
running,  40;  batters'  running, 
40;  fearlessness,  40;  infielders, 
41;  playing  ahead,  41;  coach- 
ing, 41. 

Bicycles:  need  of  good  roads,  96; 
sidewalk  riding,  97;  politeness 
pays,  98;  "scorching,"  99; 
costumes  for  girls,  100;  cloth- 
ing, 108;  the  machine,  104; 
the  cheapest  of  luxuries,  105. 

Boating  (see  Cretv  'JVainin^). 

Bowls,  303. 

Boynton,  Captain,  224. 

Bliss  of  Yale  (foot-ball),  25. 


Butler,  Dennis  F.  (swimmer),  194. 

Cane  Rush:  not  brutal,  226;  the 
ground,  228;  the  cane,  228; 
a  hand,  228;  signals,  228;  the 
Gladiatorae,  228;  the  Robustaj, 
228;  the  Avelli,  228;  the  Saltu- 
rse,  229;  the  Palaestrae,  229; 
costume,  230;  the  rush,  ^31; 
the  scrimmage,  232 ;  the  decis- 
ion, 235;   the  prize,  236. 

Canoeing,  306. 

Copeland,  A.  F.,  hurdler,  243,  248. 

Crew  Training:  selection  of  men,  56; 
age  of  men,  57;  training,  57; 
exercise,  58;  gymnasium  work, 
59;  avoid  overdoing,  60;  food 
while  training,  60;  sleep,  63; 
regularity,  64;  time  of  prepara- 
tion, 65;  the  stroke,  66,  68; 
shell-rowing,  66;  the  full  reach, 
67,  69;  the  catch,  70;  the 
shoot,  70;  rowing,  71;  the 
rowing  machine,  72;  lifting, 
holding,  and  backing,  73;  the 
stroke  oarsmen,  73;  weight  of 
crew,  73;  trimming,  73;  ob- 
jects of  training,  73. 


315 


3i6 


THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS. 


Cricket :  first  game  of,  in  America,  76; 
the  field,  76;  the  pitch,  76; 
stumps,  77;  bails,  78;  bowler's 
crease,  78;  the  bat,  78;  ar- 
rangement of  game,  79;  the 
bowler,  79;  the  batsman,  80; 
placing  the  field,  81  ;  bowling 
and  pitching,  81. 

Croquet,  303. 

Crosby  of  Harvard  (foot-ball),  25. 

Dana,  R.  H.,  186. 
Discus,  the,  308. 

England  and  Australia  Cricket  Match, 
82. 

Foot-ball:  how  to  develop  a  team, 
21;  blocking  and  kicking,  22; 
team  play,  23;  blocking  and 
getting  through,  24;  tackling, 
25;  the  tackle  l)ag,  26;  pass- 
ing, 26;  a  back's  duties,  26; 
warding  off,  29;  self  coaching, 
29;  practice  games,  30;  team 
spirit,  30;  "stars"  no  good, 
30;  responsibility  of  each  man, 
31;  detail  work,  31;  signalling, 
32 ;  a  champion  eleven,  32. 

Germantown  Cricket  Club,  82. 

Golf:  popularity  of,  88;  exercise  in, 
89;  an  all-the-year  game,  89; 
space  a  requisite,  90;  a  full 
course,  90;  the  putting  green, 
90;  the  teeing  ground,  91; 
the  ball,  91;  the  game,  91; 
"honor,"  92;  a  round,  92; 
singles,  92;  a  foursome,  93;  a 
moderate  golf  equipment,  93. 


Gymnastics:  benefits  of,  146;  fresh 
air  the  chief  tonic,  146;  an  out- 
of-door  "gym,"  147;  the 
Charlesliank,  147;  class  drill, 
148;  the  giant  stride,  150;  the 
neck  developer,  151;  the  medi- 
cine ball,  151;  the  spring  board, 
152;  the  buck,  152;  the  tilting 
ladder,  152;  the  Jacob's  ladder, 
154;  the  "  razzle  dazzle,"  154; 
a  home  gymnasium,  156;  tra- 
peze bar,  157;  rings,  158;  hori- 
zontal bar,  158;  jumping  stand- 
ards, 162;   vaulting-horse,  162. 

Ilabberton,  John,  on  canoeing,  306. 

Hare  and  Hounds:  the  hares,  122; 
the  hounds,  122;  the  master, 
122;  the  scent,  122;  the  route, 
122;  prizes,  123;  an  ideal 
course,  123;  the  break;  125; 
endurance,  127. 

Harvard  Batting  Team  of  '91,  37. 

Haverford  College,  cricket  at,  87. 

Hand-in-Hand    Skating    (see    Skat- 

Hawks,  Lord  (cricket),  82. 

Hitches  (see  A'nots,  Hitches,  and 
Splices). 

Hurdling:  requirements  for,  116; 
the  spring,  117;  distances,  117; 
the  hurdles,  1 18;  strides,  118; 
description  of,  238;  elements 
of  a  good  hurdler,  241;  striking 
the  hurdles,  244;  handicap 
races,  246,  249;  "  mug-hunt- 
ers," 247;  the  "scratch"  man, 
248,  250;  the  "scratch  "  races, 
250;  the  intercollegiate  con- 
tests, 250. 


INDEX. 


317 


Interscholastic  tournaments,  value 
of,  48. 

Jordan,  A.  A.,  the  hurdler,  244. 

Jump,  the  Running  Broad:  the 
jumping  path,  252;  the  jumping 
foot,  252;  number  of  strides, 
253;  the  marks,  253;  the  take- 
off, 254;  a  foul,  254;  the  jump, 
255;  landing,  256;  caution  and 
advice  to  jumpers,  257;  train- 
ing, 258. 

Knots,  Hitches,  and  Splices,  280; 
a  square  knot,  281;  beckct 
knot,  281;  bowline,  252;  single 
wall  and  double  wall,  282; 
boatswain's  whipping,  283; 
stopper  knot,  283;  sheepshank, 
284;  true-lover's  knot,  285; 
■jar  sling,  285;  Turk's  head, 
286;  hitches,  289;  Blackwall 
hitch,  290;  clove  hitch,  290; 
rolling  hitch  and  cat's  jiaw,  292; 
splicing,  292;  the  eye  splice, 
293- 

Lake  of  Harvard  (foot-ball),  29. 

Lawn  Tennis:  not  so  easy  as  it 
looks,  43;  value  of  tournaments, 
48;  choice  of  rackets,  50;  balls, 
51;  a  good  stroke,  51;  length 
of  court,  52;  fast  service,  52; 
the  volley,  52 ;  hitting  and 
"smashing,"  55;   odds,  55. 

Ix)ngwood  Cricket  Club,  87. 

Manheim  Cricket  Grounds,  85. 
Mapes,  of  Columbia  (hurdling),  238. 
Moderation  in  sport,  314. 
"Mug-hunters"  (see  Hurdling). 


Newell  of  Harvard  (foot-ball),  24. 
Nine  Holes  (see  Ball  in  tJie  I/cle). 

Olympic  Games,  revival  of,  314. 
Over-training,  17. 

Pancratium  (see  Cane  Rush). 
Paper  Chase  (see  Hare  and  Hounds). 
Pedestrian  Exercise  (see  Walking). 
Philadelphia,  the  home  of  American 

Cricket,  81. 
Prize-giving  in  "sports,"  300. 

Quoits:  the  pin,  308;  the  hob,  308; 
science  in,  311. 

Rolierts,  Mr.,  Y.  M.  C.  A,  Gymna- 
sium (Boston),  151. 

Running:  long  legs  not  needed, 
107;  heart  must  be  strong,  108; 
dashes,  109;  training,  109; 
sprinting.  III;  positions,  11 1; 
stylos  of  starting,  112;  the 
scratch,  112;  style  of  running, 
116.  (See  yump  and  Hurd- 
ling.) 

Running  Broad  Jump,  The  (see 
Jump). 

St.  Paul's  School,  cricket  at,  87. 

Sears,  F.  R.  (tennis),  45. 

Skating:  first  lessons  in,  259;  plain 
forward  movement,  259;  the 
rolls,  260;  cutting  the  Derby  (or 
left  over  right),  263;  cutting 
the  crab,  264;  figure  of  three 
and  of  eight,  264;  the  rosette, 
265;  scissors,  265;  grapevine 
twist,  265;  Virginia  fence,  265; 
on  to  Richmond,  265 ;  hand-in- 
hand     skating,     267;      hgckey 


3i8 


THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS. 


Skating,  continued. 

skating,  268;  speed  skating, 
268;  figure  skating,  268;  hand- 
in-hand  figures,  269;  the  Mer- 
cury (forward  and  backward), 
270,  277;  backward  cross-roll, 
270,  275;  the  Dutch  roll,  272; 
the  flying  Mercury,  278;  double 
Mohawks,  Q  scuds,  and  rocking 
turns,  278;  skate-fastenings  and 
foot-gear,  279. 

Sliding  machine  for  base-ball,  36. 

Splices  (see  Knots,  Hitches,  and 
Splices'). 

Stagg  of  Yale  (base-ball),  36. 

Summer  Sports,  295 ;  antiquity  of, 
296;  rules  and  restrictions  in, 
300. 

Surrey  and  Nottinghamshire  Cricket 
Match,  82. 

Swimming:  confidence  essential, 
190;  secret  of  a  good  stroke, 
191;  dog-fashion,  192;  the 
breast  stroke,  192;  side  stroke, 
193;  right-hand,  left-hand,  and 
overhand  stroke,  193;  back  per- 
formances, 194;  diving,  195; 
under-water  swimming,  196; 
treading  water,  199;  other  feats, 


200;  precautions,  201;  a  tub 
race,  203;  a  water  circus,  206; 
water  polo,  213;  water  shoes, 
223. 

Tennis  (see  Laivn  Tennis). 
Trafford  of  Harvard  (foot-ball),  29. 
Tub  Race,  A  (see  Swimming). 

University  of  Pennsylvania,  cricket 
at,  87. 

Walking:  value  of,  128;  time  of  a 
walking  trip,  129;  arranging 
route,  130;  outfit,  131;  cloth- 
ing. 133;  size  of  party,  137; 
eating,  138;  out-of-door  sleep- 
ing, 140;  routes  suggested,  143; 
have  an  object,  145. 

Water  Circus,  A  (see  Swimming). 

Water  Polo  (see  Swimming). 

Water  Shoes  (see  S7oimming).  ■ 

Winter  of  Yale  (foot-ball),  25. 

Yachting:  the  compass,  166;  tak- 
ing a  bearing,  173;  keeping  the 
course,  174;  management,  175; 
fair-weather  sailing,  176;  in  an 
emergency,  176;  sea-terms,  179- 
186;  starboard  and  port,  187- 
189. 


MAY  1^  1965 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFOP^'^'*   L^"  " 
*-       --: UNIVERSITY  '^F  ''     '  »FORNI A  LIBRARY 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

305  De  Neve  Drive  -  Parking  Lot  17  •  Box  951388 

LOS  ANGELES,  CALIFORNIA  90095-1388 

Return  this  materia!  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


APRl 


6  2m 


UCLA  COL  LIB  u AD  „^  .p^, 
RECEIVED  ^'^^  ^  0  20)7 


ml 


IJQF 

UCSOUThCRN  RE3'0NAL  LiBHAfit  fa:  , 


BUILDlNf 

^  ^       g  ^^^    g     r*^^  'InlmBllnl'BlllillliiiliiiiliilillillllliMliiililnii   p  • 

NONCiR'v^trft?'..' .  J 

TO  ALL 
BORROWERS 


